Robusta RPA

Robusta RPA: Your Digital Workforce

Robusta RPA is a powerful tool that lets you automate your company’s repetitive tasks. Think of it as a way to create your own digital workforce! It helps you design, manage, and run software robots that can perform tasks just like a human would – but faster and without errors.

How Robusta RPA Works

Robusta RPA uses two main components:

  • Orchestrator: This is the brain of the operation. It’s where you design, schedule, and manage your automated processes and robots.
  • Robots: These are the digital workers that carry out the tasks you define. They can interact with your applications and systems just like a human employee would.

Robusta RPA System Requirements

Robusta RPA installation includes the installation of Robusta Orchestrator and Robusta Worker. Robusta Orchestrator server is required for system management and process designs. Robusta Worker installation is required for processes to run and for automation.

Robusta Orchestrator Server System Requirements1

FeatureMinimum System RequirementRecommended System Requirement
Processor64 Bit – 4 Core64 Bit – 4 Core or more
RAM16 GB32 GB or above
Storage Space256 GB256 GB or above
Operating SystemWindows Server 2016 or above
Operating System LanguageEnglish
Administrator PrivilegesLocal Admin
Ports9080, 8443
AutoLogonEnabled (Not required)
Internet ConnectionRequired for downloading installation files and web automation
Database2PostgreSQL or access connection to the database to be installed (JDBC support required)
  1. Orchestrator server requirements may vary depending on the Chatbot and Document Understanding features being utilized.
  2. Robusta RPA will be installed on the Orchestrator server with a PostgreSQL database unless a specific selection is made for the installation. If there is a specifically managed and used database server, the installation can be done there by granting access authorization to this database.

Robusta Digital Worker System Requirements3

FeatureMinimum System RequirementRecommended System Requirement
Processor64 Bit – 4 Core64 Bit – 4 Core or more
RAM416 GB16 GB or above
Storage Space128 GB128 GB or above
Operating SystemWindows Server 2016 or Windows 10 or newer
Operating System LanguageEnglish
Administrator PrivilegesLocal Admin
Ports9080, 8443
AutoLogonEnabled (Not required)
Lock ScreenDisabled
Screen Resolution1920X1080 – %100 
Automatic RestartDisabled
Windows Developer ModeEnabled
Internet ConnectionRequired for downloading installation files and web automation
  1. System requirements may vary depending on the specific needs of individual robotic process automation projects, particularly due to the system requirements of any third-party software being utilized.
  2. Handling large data files during automation can be memory-intensive. You may need to upgrade your RAM to ensure smooth and efficient processing.

Robusta RPA Architectural Structure

Robusta Orchestrator and Robusta Worker Service Architecture

Robusta Orchestrator and Robusta Worker Installation Architecture

Attended vs Unattended Robots

RPA (Robotic Process Automation) is a technology used to automate repetitive tasks in business processes.
Robots, which are the most important factors in RPA, are divided into two categories as “attended” and “unattended“.

  • The differences between attended and unattended bot in RPA are based on control, monitoring, and response requirements and usage scenarios.

Differences


How they work?

Where is it usually used?

For these reasons

Quick Start Guide

The quick start guide contains information on setting up Robusta Worker, running Robusta Worker, and connecting to Orchestrator.

You can also find information on designing and running your first automation process with the quick start guide.

How to Install Robusta Worker

Installing Robusta RPA Worker

Select the installation language as English and continue.

Read and accept the license agreement and continue.

Choose the destination folder for the installation files and continue.

Select additional tasks and start installation.

Once the installation complete, click finish to complete the process.

Run the setup file (i.e RobustaWorkerPROD.exe or RobustaWorkerCE) and follow the steps.

Select the installation language as English and continue.

Read and accept the license agreement and continue.

Select the destination location and continue.

Select additional tasks and start installation.

Once the installation complete, click finish to complete the process.

Starting Robusta RPA Worker and Connection to Robusta Orchestrator

Starting Robusta RPA Worker

To start Robusta RPA Worker double click the shortcut on your desktop.
If the shortcut is not available the worker file is located under the following folder: C:RobustaWorkerCE/RWorkerCE.exe

Once you started Robusta Worker, you can see the status of the worker.

It may take up to 10 min. until Robusta Worker is completely up and running depending on the configuration of the computer. You will see the status as shown in the picture if the worker is up.


When Robusta Worker is ready, Robusta Orchestrator Login screen will open automatically.


On the login screen, provide the requested information in the table below and press the Connect button.

UsernameYour username (eg. john.doe)
PasswordYour password (eg. abc123)

The buttons on the left provide a quick access to the sites and applications.

  • Modeler – Redirects to modeler website https://cloud.robusta.ai:8443/modeler/#/processes”
  • Winspy – is a Robusta application that is used to access web browsers and windows applications and access relevant XPath information.
  • Need Help? – It directs you to the Robusta Documentation website.

To start Robusta RPA Worker double click the shortcut on your desktop.
If the shortcut is not available the worker file is located under the following folder: C:RobustaWorkerCE/RWorkerCE.exe

Once you started Robusta Worker, you can check the status on Robusta icon at taskbar.

It may take up to 10 min. until Robusta Worker is completely up and running depending on the configuration of the computer. You will see the status as shown in the picture if the worker is up.

Connection to Robusta Orchestrator Web Application

Open the connection screen by double clicking the Start Robusta Connector hotkey on the desktop. If there is no shortcut on the desktop, you can open the connection screen by running the file in the directory: C:RobustaWorkerCERobustaConnector-GUI.bat .

Once you start the connector, you will see the Robusta Orchestrator Login screen. On the login screen, provide the requested information in the table below and press the Connect button.

UsernameYour username (eg. john.doe)
PasswordYour password (eg. abc123)
Worker Port Number8843
Orch Addresscloud.robusta.ai or Your orchestrator server IP address

Design a Process with Robusta Modeler

You can login to Modeler (Design Studio) by using the orchestrator server IP address or domain address. For example: https://cloud.robusa.ai/modeler or https://1.2.3.4:8443/modeler

You can use the same username and password in the worker connection process. Type your username and password to login to the Modeler.

In Processes tab, you will find the menus to create, import, search and edit processes.

To create a new process, click Create Process button.

Fill the necessary fields and click Create New Model button.

You must enter the Model name and Model key fields.

Following screenshots show a process in design studio. On the left panel, you can the see BPM and RPA components all together. On the right side, you can see the canvas where we generate process flow.

You just need to drag and drop a selected activity onto the canvas and fill necessary parameters. To define the flow, you need to connect the activities to each other by using arrows.

For example, the values for Move activity under File operations may be set as given at the following table:

File nameC:TrainingProcessesMoveFileFiletoMove.txt
Destination pathC:TrainingProcessesMoveFileFoldertoMoveFiletoMoveNew.txt

Drag and drop arrow icon on the activity to connect two activities.

After you completed the process flow, you should validate the model to check for errors. You can use the Validate button to validate your model.

Once you validated the process flow, you must save the model. You can use the Save button to save your model.

After saving a process, this process should be included in an App to be run. In Apps tab, you will find the menus to create, import, edit apps.

To create a App, you need to click Create App button, fill necessary fields and then, click Create New App Definition button.

Set Group access “Your Group Id” to prevent your app to be seen by others.

To add your model into an app, click Edit included models button and select the process to be included in your app. Once you select your model, and see the plus icon on your model, click Close button.

Click Save button to save your app.

Click Publish? check box, then click Save and close editor button.

To run your process, go back to Processes tab and select your process.

To run the process on a worker, click Play button.

Select your Application and Worker then click Run Process button.

Sample Processes

Example processes with Robusta are listed below.

A Sample RPA Process with Excel Operations

How to design a sample process that includes web applications with Robusta RPA tool step by step?

You can connect to Excel from ROBUSTA RPA, add new columns and rows and use Excel operations. This tutorial will walk you through designing a sample RPA process with Excel operations, step by step.

PROCESS SCENARIO

In this tutorial:

Open an Excel file and check whether there is any flight routes data in it.

If there is, add two columns, one for calculating the number of days between departure and return dates, and one for combining these dates.

Then, continue with a repeating sub-process since you want to perform operations for each row in the Excel file.

In this sub-process, you will set the values for the newly added columns.

STEP BY STEP PROCESS

CONNECT TO EXCEL AND CREATE A DATASET

1. Start the process by using the Open activity under the Excel section to open the Excel file that contains the flight routes data.

2. Just drag and drop the activities you want to use into the design area then enter the relevant parameters.

Excel > Open

NameOpen: Flight_Routes Excel
*Excel nameFlight_Routes
*Excel file nameCurrent directory where the file is located
In the Excel name field, special character constraints is important, only letters and numbers are recommended.

3. Using the Read excel to dataset activity, transfer the data in the Excel file to a dataset.

4. Check the Has header box because our data has a header row. By doing so, it will be possible to specify the column header values in the Column fields in other activities at which you get or set cell values.

INFO – If there is no header row in the table, you should not select the Has header option.

INFO – If Sheet name field is left blank, the first page will be transferred to the dataset.

Excel > Read excel to dataset

NameRead excel to dataset
*Excel name${Flight_Routes}
*New dataset nameFlight_RoutesDS
Sheet nameRoutes
Has headerChecked

5. In the next step, get the row count of the dataset with the Get size activity.

6. After selecting the dataset from the list in the Dataset name field, choose the Row option in the Size Type field because you want the number of rows to be counted.

7. Then, in the Result variable name field, define the variable that you want to assign the row count value as ‘getSize’.

Dataset > Get size

NameGet size: Flight Routes
*Dataset name${Flight_RoutesDS}
Size typeROW
*Result variable namegetSize

8. You have to ensure that the process needs to terminate if any row is not found in the excel file. To achieve this, add an Exclusive gateway activity that allows us to create alternative flows in our process.

9. First flow condition ( ${getSize==0} ) checks whether the getSize variable value is equal to ‘true’ or not, which means there is no row in the file.

The first flow condition

Flow condition( ${getSize==0} )

10. If this condition is met, the process is completed with an end event.

11. In the second flow condition, choose the default flow option and do not set any condition expression.

The second flow condition

Default flowChecked

ADD COLUMNS

12. Continue your process by adding two columns to the dataset with the Add column activity.

13. The name of first column is “Days Between”. The name of second column is “Concatenated Days”.

14. “Days Between” column is the difference of the two date columns, “D.date” and “R.date”. “Concatenated Days” column is concatenate these two columns.

Dataset > Add column

NameAdd column: Days Between
*Dataset name${Flight_RouteDS}
*Column nameDays Between

Dataset > Add column

NameAdd column: Concatanated Dates
*Dataset name${Flight_RouteDS}
*Column nameConcatanated Dates

PROCESS ROWS IN SUB-PROCESS.

15.The next activity is Sub-Process that is used here because of recurring sub-process. We want to process each and every row in the dataset one by one.

16. We need to define how many times this sub-process will be repeated in the Cardinality field. This will be provided by using “getSize” variable.

17. Choose the value of the Multi-instance type field as Sequential because you want each operation to be done sequentially in our loop. The “loopCounter” variable is automatically defined at the beginning of the loop.

INFO – loopCounter, which first takes a value of 0 increases by 1 at each iteration. When the value of the “loopCounter” variable reaches the Cardinality value, the loop is automatically terminated.

Structural > Sub process

NameLoop for each flight route
Cardinality (Multi-instance)${getSize}
Multi-instance typeSequential
ExclusiveTrue

18. In the sub-process, obtain the flight return and departure date from the dataset with the Get action activity. Set the column header that we want to get data from in the Column field.

19. Since you want to repeat the same operation for all the rows, set ‘loopCounter’ variable in the Row field.

20. The index value of rows and columns in the dataset starts with 0, the same as the loopCounter variable.

Dataset > Get action

NameGet action: Return Date
*Dataset name${Flight_RouteDS}
*ColumnR.Date
Result variable name${loopCounter}
RowreturnDateStr

Dataset > Get action

NameGet action: Depart Date
*Dataset name${Flight_RouteDS}
*ColumnD.Date
Result variable name${loopCounter}
RowdepartureDateStr

21.Then, use the Set action activity to set an excel formula to calculate the difference of the dates.

22. Then we set to the newly created ‘Days Between’ column. In this activity, after selecting the dataset, we set the column header in the Column field and ‘loopCounter’ variable in the Row field.

23. In the Value field, write the formula( =H${loopCounter+2}-G${loopCounter+2} ) to calculate the difference between the dates by using the equal sign at the beginning.

24. The dates you want to process start from the second row of the H and G columns in the table, the row value in the formula should also start from the 2nd row. So, in the formula syntax, add 2 to the loopCounter variable.

Dataset > Set action

NameSet action: Days Between
Dataset name${Flight_RouteDS}
*TypeSTRING
*ColumnDays Between
*Value=H${loopcounter+2}-G${loopcounter+2}
Row${loopCounter}

25. In this step, combine the dates and set the value in the newly added column named ‘Concatenated Dates’. Write the variables that hold the date values in the Value field with a hyphen between them.

26. Complete the loop activity with the End event, which allows us to end the process flow.

Dataset > Set action

NameSet action: Concatanated Dates
Dataset name${Flight_RouteDS}
*TypeSTRING
*ColumnConcatanated Dates
*Value${departureDateStr}-${returnDateStr}
Row${loopCounter}

FINISH YOUR EXCEL OPERATION

27. Use Write dataset to excel activity after you finish the operations in the subprocess, which allows you to transfer all the data in a dataset to an Excel file.

28. In this activity, after selecting the dataset and the Excel file, choose the Include header option because you want to copy the header information for newly added columns.

Excel > Write dataset to excel

NameWrite dataset to excel
*Dataset name${Flight_RoutesDS}
*ShiftNONE
*Excel name${Flight_Routes}
*Value=${departureDateStr}-${returnDateStr}
Include headerTrue
Sheet nameRoutes

29.Save the Excel file in the output folder with the Save and close activity. For this, enter the directory, file name and extension of where you want to save our file in the Excel file name field.

30. In the Action field, select the Save and close option from the list and complete your process.

Excel > Save and close

NameSave and close: Flight_Routes Excel
*Excel name${Flight_Routes}
*ActionSAVE_AND_CLOSE
Excel file nameCurrent directory where the file is located

A Sample RPA Process with E-mail Operations

How to design a sample process that includes e-mail operations with Robusta RPA tool step by step?

PROCESS SCENARIO

In this tutorial:

Connect to an e-mail account and search for unread e-mails with a specific subject and an attached file.

Forward each matching e-mail that meets certain conditions to another e-mail account. 

For the e-mails which do not meet the condition, reply to the sender that the request is invalid.

STEP BY STEP PROCESS

1.Drag and drop Imap/Smtp connection activity under Mail component to connect to e-mail account.

INFO – While SMTP protocol is used for sending e-mail; IMAP protocol is used for e-mail reading.

Mail > Imap/Smtp connection

NameImap/Smtp connection : Connect to E-mail account
Configuration nameconnectionName
*Connection nametestCon
*Imap hostimap.gmail.com
*Imap port993
*Imap userE-mail address for IMTP protocol.
*Imap password${password}
Imap sslTrue
*Smtp hostsmtp.gmail.com
*Smtp port587
*Smtp userE-mail address for SMTP protocol.
*Smtp password${password}
Smtp tls enabledTrue
Smtp tls requiredTrue

2. Provide the configuration of both protocols to be able to perform e-mail operations.

3. To connect to the Gmail account, get information from the relevant page of Google. (https://support.google.com/mail/answer/7126229?hl#zippy=%2Cstep-change-smtp-other-settings-in-your-email-client)

INFO – Data Object allows to define a variable and use it in any activity in the process. Click any area in the process design area to open the Data Object field.

4. In the Data Object field, define a variable named “password” and use it in the password fields.

INFO – Write the variable name between curly braces after a dollar sign (${}).

5. Find the date three days before today with the Script task activity.

INFO – It will be using it as the minimum date in the Mail search activity

6. Drag and drop Script task activity under Activities component and use the javascript to find the date.

7. Assign the current date to the variable threeDaysAgo with the New Date function.

INFO – The current date that is assigned is the form of year, month, day with hyphens between them.

8. Update this variable that was created to be the date of 3 days ago. 

9. Convert this variable to string format with toLocaleDateString function.

10. Concatenate them by adding a dot between them. Save this variable with the execution.setVariable function to use it as a minimum date.

INFO – The MinDate variable here will be used to find e-mails less than 3 days old.

12. Write the variable name between curly braces after a dollar sign.

Activities> Script task

Script formatjavascript
Scriptvar threeDaysAgo = new Date();
threeDaysAgo.setDate(threeDaysAgo.getDate()-3);
var date = threeDaysAgo.toLocaleDateString();
var splitDate = date.split(“-“);
var year = splitDate[0];
var month = splitDate[1];
var day = splitDate[2];
var minDate = day+”.”+month+”.”+year;
execution.setVariable(“minDate”, minDate);
NameScript task : Find three days ago
ExclusiveTrue

13. Use the Search activity under the Mail component.

14. In the connection name field, select the connection reference name that is defined in the first activity from the list.

15. Find the e-mails with the subject containing the phrase “Flight Routes” and containing an attached file. For this, write “Flight Routes” in the Subject field and tick the has attachment box.

16. Do not change the default value of INBOX in the Folder name field, and provide the relevant search to be in the Inbox.

17. By selecting the Unread box, search for unread e-mails, and define a variable in the Dataset field to assign all e-mails’ data to a dataset.

18. Set the e-mail limit to be searched as 10 in the Search limit field. This means that even if there are more than 10 e-mails matching the search criteria, only the 10 most recent e-mails will be imported into the dataset.

19. Leave the From parameter blank, where we can choose from whom the e-mail came from.

Mail > Search

NameSearch : E-mails for flight routes price request
*Connection name${testCon}
*Folder nameINBOX
Has attachment?True
Search limit10
Min date${minDate}
SubjectFlight Routes
UnreadTrue
*New dataset nameemailSearchDS

INFO – If you want to see Dataset, open an Excel file that contains the data of the dataset resulting from this activity. This picture contains information we received via e-mail (Such as subject, sender’s e-mail, mail body etc.).

20.Find the number of e-mails transferred to the dataset using the Get size activity under the Dataset component.

21. Choose the ROW option in the Size type field from the list.

Dataset > Get size

NameGet size : Request count
*Dataset name${emailSearchDS}
Size typeROW
*Result variable nameemailSearchDSSize

22. Terminate this process if no e-mails are found, and continue if there is at least one e-mail.

23. To do this, use a gateway that allows us to control how a process flows according to the conditions we set.

24. For each arrow leaving the gateway, set a condition expression according to the e-mail count variable.

25. If the value of this variable is 0, end the process flow. Otherwise, choose the default flow option, and do not set any condition expression.

26. The process will continue from here if it does not match a condition.

Flow condition(${emailSearchDSSize==0})

27. If the process does not end at this point, continue with a loop activity, since the operations will be done independently for each e-mail.

28. Include the Sub-process activity from the Structure section to create a loop activity in the process.

29. As in the main process, you need to create a flow with a beginning and end event in this sub-process and need to define how many times this sub-process will be repeated in the Cardinality field.

30. If you do not make this definition, the sub-process will run once.

31. In this example, since you want to loop as many as the number of matching e-mails, write the variable that holds the number of e-mails in the Cardinality field in curly brackets.

32. Choose the value of the Multi-instance type field as Sequential because you want each operation to be done sequentially in our loop.

33. The “loopCounter” variable is automatically defined at the beginning of the loop.

INFO – loopCounter, which first takes a value of 0 increases by 1 at each iteration. When the value of the “loopCounter” variable reaches the Cardinality value, the loop is automatically terminated.

Structural> Sub process

NameLoop for each e-mail request
ExclusiveTrue
Multi-instance typeSequential
Cardinality (Multi-instance)${emailSearchDSSize}

34. In Read/Save/Attachment activity, after selecting the testCon connection name from the list in the Connection name field, write the loopCounter variable in the E-mail number field, which indicates the current iteration number. In this way, ensuring that e-mails are processed one by one.

35. Since you want to archive the attached files, check the Save attachments box and enter the directory path where you want the files to be saved in the Save Path field.

36. By selecting the Mark as Read option, ensure that the e-mails are marked as read.

37. Thus, when the process runs again, it will not be processing the same e-mails again and again. Import the list of attached files into a dataset.

Mail > Read/Save/Attachment

NameRead/Save/Attachment : Dowload to ‘archieve’ folder
*Connection name${testCon}
*Dataset nameemailSearchDS
Mail no${loopCounter}
Mark as read?True
Save attachments?True
Save pathThe location you want to save the files.
Attachment database nameAttachmentDS

38. In this step, similar to the use of the Get size activity that we explained in the first parts of the process, find the row number of the dataset to which the list of the attached files is transferred.

Dataset > Get size

NameGet size : Attached file count
*Dataset name${AttachmentDS}
Size typeROW
*Result variable namelistFileDSSize

39. After finding the number of attached files, add another gateway to the process as we want to perform a different operation if there is more than 1 attached file, and a different operation if there is only 1 file.

40. If there is more than one attached file, continue with the Reply activity, and send the message that includes “Cannot process more than one attached file”.

Flow condition(${listFileDSSize>=2})

41. Continue with the Reply activity and select the testCon connection from the list in the connection name field

42. Write the loopCounter variable in the mail no field to respond to each e-mail.

43. Later, choose the is HTML? box because e-mail body is in html format.

44. At the same time, select the Reply all option for reply all.

Mail > Reply

NameReply : Request is not valid
*Connection name${testCon}
*Dataset name${emailSearchDS}
Mail no${loopCounter}
MessageCannot process more than one attached file
Is HTML?True
Reply all?True

45. If there is 1 file attached, forward the e-mail to another e-mail address with the Forward activity. Write the relevant information from and to e-mail addresses, e-mail no, subject, and message fields.

Default flowTrue

Mail > Forward

MailForward
*Connection name${testCon}
*Dataset name${emailSearchDS}
Mail no${loopCounter}
*Fromsender’s e-mail address
*Torecipient’s e-mail address
MessageThis mail is forwarded by Robusta RPA tool.

46. Complete the subprocess flow with an End event.

47. Use another end event to terminate the main process.

A Sample RPA Process with Web Applications Operations

How to design a sample process that includes web applications with Robusta RPA tool step by step?

PROCESS SCENARIO

In this tutorial:

Do a price search from a flight ticket price comparison website that we have determined.

First ensure that the Booking.com website is opened, and a flight search will be made according to the criteria we have determined.

Find the best match from the incoming search results, assign the price information to a variable, and save the process as successful and end our process.

 In cases where flight data or the best price match is not found, save the process result as failed and end our process.

STEP BY STEP PROCESS

1. Start the process with the Open activity under the Application section to open the Booking.com website. Just drag and drop the activities you want to use into the design area.

2. In the Name field, write the website name after the default Open to explain what is done in this step. When you type a value in the Name field for all the activities, it becomes easier to understand which operations are performed through the process flow.

3. Let’s enter a reference value without spaces in the Application name field. This reference will be available to select in the later activities to determine in which application the operation will be performed.

4. Since you will use Chrome as an application, let’s choose the Chrome option from the Type field.

Applications > Mouse actions

NameOpen: Booking.com
*Application namebookingDemo
*TypeCHROME
*Urlhttps://booking.kayak.com
Wait until loadTrue
Timeout (sec)120
MaximizeTrue

5. Since the visible area for the flight departure airport on this site is not the same as the area where you will enter the data in, continue the process with the Mouse action activity, as you had to click on this area first to make visible to enter data.

Applications > Mouse actions

NameMouse actions : From Airport
*Application name${bookingDemo}
ButtonLEFT
*Field//div[contains(@id,”originairport-display-inner”)]

6. You must enter the location information in the html structure of the field that we want to click on the page in the field. Use the Inspector feature of Robusta.

7.In this step, find the location information of the flight departure airport area. For this, click on the Field and then click the New button to add a new page. After choosing Chrome as the type of application, enter the link of the “https://booking.kayak.com/” website and click the Open button.

8. After waiting for the page to open, find the location information of the area you want, by selecting the application from the list and pressing the Inspect button. To do this, move the cursor over the relevant field after clicking the button. The area will be marked in yellow.

9. When you wait for 3 seconds on this area, the yellow marking disappears, and the location information is automatically displayed in the RelXPath area.

10. Then, by clicking the OK button, save the location information in the field. Since you have learned how to get Xpath selector data with using Inspector feature of Robusta, we will proceed just using correct Xpath without trying to find again in the next components in this tutorial.

11. Obtain the variables on the Data Object screen that are defined before. We can use these variables by expressing them in the ${} structure that allows us to use them in the process. To reach Data Object window just click white space of canvas and then click Data Objects area in parameters pane.

12. Now we can use Data Objects to place them in process easily.

13. With using Set methods activity we got interact with field that we need to type “${fromAirport} “ data object to part of web form. We had ensured that the flight departure airport (“Newyork NY, NYC”) that we want to search for is written in the relevant field with the Set methods activity.

Applications > Set methods

NameSet methods : From airport
*Application Name${bookingDemo}
*Field//input[@name=”origin”]
ClearTrue
*Typetext
*Text${fromAirport}
Wait until visibleTrue

14. In the next step, use the Mouse action activity, similar to the previous one.

Applications > Mouse actions

NameMouse actions: Select From Airport
*Application name${bookingDemo}
ButtonLEFT
*Field//div[@class=”item-info”]
Wait until loadTrue
Wait until visibleTrue

15. Continue the process with another Mouse action activity, since we had to click on this area first to make visible to enter data.

Applications > Mouse actions

NameMouse actions : From Airport
*Application name${bookingDemo}
ButtonLEFT
*Field/html/body/div[1]/div[1]/main/div[1]/div[1]/div/div[1]/div/div[2]/section[2]
/div/div/div[2]/form[1]/div[1]/div/div[1]/div/div[3]/div/div/div

16. Now again use Data Objects to place variable ( ${toAirport} ) to field of web form easily.

17. With using Set methods components we got interact with field that we need to type “ ${toAirport} “ data object to part of web form. We had ensure that the flight departure airport (“Chicago, IL (CHI)”) that we want to search for is written in the relevant field with the Set methods activity.

Applications > Set methods

NameSet methods : To airport
*Application Name${bookingDemo}
*Field//input[@name=”destination”]
ClearTrue
*Typetext
*Text${toAirport}
Wait until visibleTrue

18. Use another Mouse action activity similar to the previous one.

Applications > Mouse actions

NameMouse actions: Select To Airport
*Application name${bookingDemo}
ButtonLEFT
*Field(//div[@class=”item-info”])[2]
Wait until loadTrue
Wait until visibleTrue

19. Continue the process with the Mouse action activity since you must click on this area first to enter data.

Applications > Mouse actions

NameMouse actions: Departure Date
*Application name${bookingDemo}
ButtonLEFT
*Field//div[contains(@id,”dateRangeInputdisplay-start-inner”)]

20. Now use the Data Object‘s variable (${departureDate} ) to place them in process .

21. With using Set methods components we got interact with field that we need to type “ ${departureDate} “ data object to part of web form. We had ensure that the flight departure date that we want to search for is written in the relevant field with the Set methods activity.

Applications > Set methods

NameSet methods: Departure Date
*Application Name${bookingDemo}
*Field//div[contains(@id,”departinput”)]
ClearTrue
*Typetext
*Text${departureDate}
Wait until visibleTrue

22. Continue the process with the Mouse action activity since you must click on this area first to enter data.

Applications > Mouse actions

NameMouse actions: Return Date
*Application name${bookingDemo}
ButtonLEFT
*Field//div[contains(@id,”dateRangeInputdisplay-end-inner”)]

23. Now use the Data Object variable (${returnDate}) to place them in process .

24. With using Set methods activity we got interact with field that we need to type “ ${returnDate} “ data object to part of web form. We had ensure that the flight departure date that we want to search for is written in the relevant field with the Set methods activity.

Applications > Set methods

NameSet methods: Return Date
*Application Name${bookingDemo}
*Field//div[contains(@id,”returninput”)]
ClearTrue
*Typetext
*Text${returnDate}
Wait until visibleTrue

25. After entering all the criteria that we want, ensure that the search button was clicked. On the page that appears after clicking the Search button, we can monitor the loading process from the Loading field on the top left of the page. As you can see, when the page loads, this field is updated and its contents changes. We used this field to check if the search failed or not. For this, we used the Wait action(s) activity, where we can wait until the area we specified on the application is visible or active.

Applications > Mouse actions

NameMouse actions: Click Search
*Application name${bookingDemo}
ButtonLEFT
*Field(//button[contains(@id,”submit”)])[1]

26. In Wait actions activity, choose the visible option in the Wait for field, as we want to wait until the location field we entered is visible. Return to the Open activity, the first activity of the process for how long we want to wait and enter it in the Timeout field as in seconds. Since we entered the value of 120 in this field, it will take time to load results on Booking.com. If it does not load within specified time, this step will end with an error.

Applications > Wait actions

NameWait actions: Check if loaded
*Application name${bookingDemo}
*Field//[@class=”col-advice”]//[@aria-busy=”false”]
*Wait forvisible

27. When this error is received, we will advance our process through a different flow. To achieve this, drag and drop and error boundary event into the Wait actions activity. When we drag the error boundary event activity, a green frame will be displayed around the activity. It means that we can drop the error boundary event and connect it with activity. Thanks to the error boundary event, the process will continue from here.

28. Use the Script task activity to generate the result message if the page could not be loaded. Thus, the process will continue from the error step. Javascript programming language is used in this case to generate error message. Type javascript in the Script format field.

29. Note variables that we defined in the Data Object field are received, we ensured that the value of the ticketPrice variable was left blank and the error message string was set into the Note variable. You can watch our other videos to learn the detailed usage of the Script task activity.

Activties> Script task

Script formatjavascript
Scriptexecution.getVariable(“ticketPrice”);
execution.getVariable(“Note”);
ticketPrice = “”;
Note= “No matching ticket is found.”;
execution.setVariable(“ticketPrice”,ticketPrice);
execution.setVariable(“Note”,Note);
NameScript task: No ticket

30. Use the Close activity to close the website we have opened. In the Close activity, select the reference name of the application from the Application name field and end the process with an End event activity.

Applications > Close

NameClose: booking.com
*Application name${bookingDemo}

31. Continue the process with the Function activity to learn how many tickests were on the page when the search was concluded. The Functions activity allows us toget various information of the elements on the page.

32. Enter the location information of the ticket fields listed in this activity in the html structure into the field and choose the element count option from the Action field.

Applications > Functions

NameFunctions: Get Ticket Row Count
*Application name${bookingDemo}
*Field//*[@class=”resultWrapper”]
Result variable nameticketRowCount
Actionelementcount

33. Then, according to the variable return from the Function activity, ensure that if no flight was found, the process was terminated, and if there was a flight, the process continued. To do this, use a gateway that allows us to advance the process according to conditions we set.

The flow condition (${ticketRowCount==0}) parameter of the Gateway we used in this process will come from the variable we determined in the previous step. If the value of this variable is 0, that is, there is no ticket, we have ensured that the condition returns true and the process proceeds and ends from here.

Flow condition(${ticketRowCount==0})

34. Use again the Script task activity to obtain information if no matching ticket is found information. Type script format as javascript and type the script into the Script field.

Activities> Script task

Script formatjavascript
Scriptexecution.getVariable(“ticketPrice”);
execution.getVariable(“Note”);
ticketPrice = “”;
Note= “No matching ticket is found.”;
execution.setVariable(“ticketPrice”,ticketPrice);
execution.setVariable(“Note”,Note);
NameScript task: No ticket


35. To terminate the process, drag and drop the Close activity and select the reference name of the application that we want to close from the list. Finally, we ended the process with an End event.

Applications > Close

NameClose: booking.com
*Application name${bookingDemo}

36. In the case there is a flight, check the Default flow checkbox and process will continue from here.

Default flowTrue

37. Use the Function activity similar to the previous one, to query whether there is a flight with the best price information on the page.

Applications > Functions

NameFunctions: Get Ticket Row Count
*Application name${bookingDemo}
*Field//*[@class=”bfLabel bf-best”]
Result variable namebestPriceFlag
Actionexists

38. To control whether there is a best ticket or not, use the Exclusive gateway activity.

39. Type (${bestPriceFlag==false}) in the Flow condition field to control If there is no flight with the best price information.

Flow condition(${bestPriceFlag==false})

40. Use the Script task activity to send the “No best ticket” message.

Activities> Script task

Script formatjavascript
Scriptexecution.getVariable(“ticketPrice”);
execution.getVariable(“Note”);
ticketPrice = “”;
Note= “No matching best ticket is found.”;
execution.setVariable(“ticketPrice”,ticketPrice);
execution.setVariable(“Note”,Note);
NameScript task: No best ticket

41. To close the web site, use the Close activity and select the reference name of application from the Application name field. End the process with an End event activity.

Applications > Close

NameClose: booking.com
*Application name${bookingDemo}

42. Type (${bestPriceFlag==true}) in the Flow condition field to control If there is a flight with the best price information.

Flow condition(${bestPriceFlag==true})

43. Use the Script task activity to send the “Found best ticket” message.

Activities> Script task

Script formatjavascript
Scriptexecution.getVariable(“Note”);
Note = “Best ticket is found.”;
execution.setVariable(“Note”,Note);
NameScript task: Found best ticket

44. To receive the best ticket price, drag and drop the Get methods activity. After selecting text from the Type field, type the location information of the best price in the field and assign the result to the ticketPrice variable.

Activities> Get methods

NameGet methods: Ticket Price
*Application name${bookingDemo}
*Field//span[@class=”price option-text”]
*Typetext
Result variable nameticketPrice

45. Finally close the page and end the process.

Applications> Close

NameClose: booking.com
*Application name${bookingDemo}

How to Guides

Using WinSpy

WinSpy is a Robusta application that is used to access web browsers and windows applications and access relevant XPath information.

Usage on The Web Browser

WinSpy assists with path-related operations on a Windows application. It enables users to obtain the location (XPath) information of the fields to perform operations like writing a text on the desired area of an application, getting data from the desired area, clicking on the desired areas or taking a screenshot of whole screen and a part of it.

1. Double-click the winSpy.exe file to open WinSpy.

2. Click Settings > Driver > Chrome.

Search Operation

3. In this scenario, we will open a Youtube page and will perform a search operation using WinSpy on Youtube page.

4. In the WinSpy application, type or copy-paste the Youtube URL  (https://youtube.com) information into the Address textbox.

5. Click the Run button next to the Address textbox to start operations.

6. After clicking on the button, WinSpy opens a new Chrome page different from the opened Chrome page and enters the Youtube page. Thus, WinSpy connection is established with the Youtube page.

7. As you can see in the picture below, the page tags are listed as a tree view on the left. When you click on an element from there, the information of that element appears in the Information field. The location information corresponding to the data is automatically found by WinSpy and displayed in the XPath Result fields. Both information can be used in Robusta RPA. Robusta recommends the Relative Path information for your cases.

7-a. Alternatively, click on the Inspect button to find the XPath information for the selected element. WinSpy will focus on the page. Hover your cursor on the element you want to interact with and give a moment to WinSpy until it detects the element automatically. WinSpy will focus on itself when it finds the XPath information. Meanwhile, the element under the cursor will be displayed in yellow.

8. Click the Inspect button to find the XPath of the selected element and it directs you to the page.

9. Hover over the element and wait for 2-3 second (it may take a longer than 2-3 seconds).

10. The information of the relevant element will automatically come to the Relative Path field.

11. If the element is textbox, an element where text can be written, the control of location information can be made by typing a word in the Try It field. Type the text in Try It field. Then, click the Set Text button. WinSpy writes the text to the relevant field on the browser.

12. Since we want to search Robusta on Youtube, click the Inspect button again and hover over the Search button and wait for 2-3 seconds to obtain the XPath of the desired element.

13. If the relevant element is a button, an element that can be clicked, you can control the location information. Click the Click button in the Try It field on the WinSpy.

14. Thus, we performed a search operation on Youtube via WinSpy.

17. The XPath information found manually can be checked on WinSpy. Type or copy-paste XPath information found manually in the XPath field and click the Test button to control the information.

If you want to scrap a table from a web page, table XPath information can be found via WinSpy.

1. Click the Scrap button to scrap a table on WinSpy.

2. You will see the First Header and the Second Header fields on the Scrap window. Click the “…” button next to the First Header field.

3. Hover over the first header element for 2-3 seconds and repeat the same process for the second header field..

4. After founding XPath information of two headers, click the Next button.

5. Click the “…” button next to the First Column field

6. Hover over the first column area for 2-3 seconds and repeat the same process for the second column.

7. After founding XPath information of first and second columns, click on the Next button.

8. Last, you should select the XPath information for the first and second rows in this step.

9. Click the “” button next to the First Row field.

10. Hover over the first row area for 2-3 seconds and repeat the same process for the second row.

11. Click the Finish button.

12. After finishing all the steps correctly, XPath information of the relevant Table will be displayed on the Result Step window.

Usage on Windows Applications

WinSpy Driver Selection

WinSpy assists with path-related operations on a Windows application. It enables users to obtain the location (XPath) information of the fields to perform operations like writing a text on the desired area of an application, getting data from the desired area, clicking on the desired areas, and taking a screenshot of the screen.

1. Double-click the winSpy.exe file to open Winspy.

2. Click Settings > Driver > WinAppDriver.

3. The file must be opened before this step. Type the file name and extension (Word.docx) into the Address textbox and click the Run button.

4. WinSpy tool will provide access to the application whose title information is open on the screen. This process may take some time.

5. In order to reach the frame structure opened in a windows application, the title information of the main page is entered in the Address field and the frame to be accessed is selected from the pop-up window under the Frame title. You can refresh the element list by clicking the button next to the field.

6. The application path information on the screen appears in the box under the Search field. The name information of the field in which XPath information is required to be found in the application can be found by typing in the Search textbox and clicking the Find button. (Text information of the relevant item is positioned on the correct item if there is only one on the screen. If there is more than one, it can find all fields or buttons and can be found by browsing to the desired area one by one by clicking the Find button.)

7. The XPath information can now be accessed after the desired field is found in the box containing the information about the page. Click on the element that you want to interact with, and WinSpy will provide the full XPath information of the relevant element in the Absolute Path textbox. To obtain a more understandable Xpath, click on the element that you want to interact with on the left side of WinSpy and click on the Find XPath button from the right side of WinSpy. WinSpy will provide unique XPath information on the Relative Path (Recommended for use) field for the element.

8. If the amount of elements on the screen you want to access is high, the details of some areas of the application may not be loaded on the screen at the beginning. To find inaccessible or unavailable elements, click on the first element of the page at the window as seen in the picture. This process may take some time.

Robusta RPA Process Initiation and Tracking Guide

This guide explains how to run and track the processes in Robusta RPA.

1. Scheduler Module

The following operations can be performed on Scheduler module pages under the Robusta Orchestrator application:

  • Starting the processes with or without scheduling
  • Tracking completed, running, waiting processes, and displaying information about these
    processes
  • Displaying the errors in the process runs

Scheduler module can be accessed by clicking the Scheduler icon on the Orchestrator application homepage. The orchestrator application homepage can be opened with the link “https://<>:<>”. (e.g. https://127.0 0.1:8443)

The applications defined in the design studio (Modeler) are listed on the Scheduler module homepage. By selecting an application, operations related to the processes under this application can be performed, or by selecting the Task App application, the information on the process runs under all applications can be accessed.

1.1. Starting a Process

The following page is opened by selecting the relevant application (App) on the Scheduler module homepage. On this page, the processes under the selected application can be started and the previous run(s) of these processes can be seen. Click the Start a process button to run a process under the application.

On the page that opens, select the process to run and fill in the run parameters. The processes can be set to run one-time or periodically based on an interval by setting the parameters properly. Also, the process start time can be set as immediately or scheduled for a future time. Parameters are divided into two sections: Scheduling Properties and Working Properties. To display the relevant section, click on the headings and the fields in the relevant section will be displayed. After setting all the necessary parameters, click the Start Process button to start a process.

Scheduling ParametersExplanation
EveryThis parameter enables scheduling by minute, hour, day, week, month and year. Depending on the selections made in this area, the detailed selection screen with minute/hour/day values appears on the right side. Multiple values can be selected by holding down the control (CTRL) key on the detail screen. For example, for a process that will run every 15 minutes, this parameter should be selected as Hour and 0/15/30/45 selections should be made at the same time on the right pane.
Start DateThe date to start scheduling is selected.
End DateThe date the scheduling will end is selected.
Run OnceIf the process is to be run only once, this field is selected without entering any scheduling parameters. If the Run Immediately is not selected, the process will begin on the date selected in the Start Date field.
Run ImmediatelyThis field enables the process to run immediately once there is an available and appropriate Robusta worker.

In the Working Properties section, options other than the parameters that determine when the process starts can be defined.

Run Parameters
(Working Properties)
Explanation
Retry CountIf the process ends with fail status, it will be retried as many numbers as
given in this field (E.g., if 3 is given in this field, it is ensured that it is run
3 more times if the process fails.).
WorkerThe worker on which the process will work is selected from the list. Which worker is assigned to a given process is chosen at the RPA-Admin
module. Only the workers whom the application of the process is assigned are listed here.
Pre-EventIt is the area where the pre-requisite needed to run the processes is
assigned. After the event definitions are made in the RPA-Admin module,
the event is selected from the predefined Pre-Event list (Options: FTP,
MAIL, FILE).
Post ProcessIt is the area where a process is selected to be run after the process ends.
By clicking the Selection field, the process(es) to be run is selected from
the list for both success and fail statuses separately.

The following table provides examples of how to assign the parameters for processes that are intended to be run at different intervals and durations.

Sample Scenario

Declarations

Run once and immediately

Run once and on a
predetermined date

Run once per minute

Run at the beginning of each
hour and past 5

Run once a day at 1:30 a.m.

Run every Monday and Friday
at 6:15 a.m.

Run-on the 10th of each
month and at 11:59 p.m.

Run at 01:00 on the first day of
January, April, July, October

1.2. Process Tracking from Scheduled Process Tab

On the Scheduled Process tab, a lot of information can be displayed for the scheduled processes in the selected application, such as statuses, scheduled times, and frequency. If the processes in all applications are to be displayed on one screen, the Task App application should be selected on the homepage of the Scheduler module.

On the left side of this page, there are query criteria that enable running/scheduled processes to be found. After the criteria fields are populated, the matching process schedules are listed in the table on the right by pressing the SEARCH button. Inquiries can be made according to the following search criteria:

PROCESS NAMEIn order to reach any process in the list on the right, the name of the process is entered in this field.
PROCESS KEYKey information is entered in this field to search according to the keys used in the processes in the list on the right.
PARAMETERSParameter information is entered in this field to search according to the parameters used in the processes in the list on the right. Parameteres be given in json file format.
PROCESS STATUSIt allows to search according to the status of the processes in the list in the right pane. The desired status information is selected from the list. (INITIAL, SCHEDULED, PAUSING, PAUSED, RESUMING, RESUMED, CANCELLING, CANCELLED, COMPLETED, WAITING).
START DATEIt enables the processes in the list on the right to be searched according to their starting dates. Date information is selected from the opened calendar. If you want to give a range, other date information is entered in the second field.
END DATEIt allows the processes in the list on the right to be searched according to their end dates. Date information is selected from the opened calendar. If you want to give a range, other date information is entered in the second field.
SCHEDULED DATEIt enables the processes in the list on the right to be searched according to their planned dates. Date information is selected from the opened calendar. If you want to give a range, other date information is entered in the second field.
Recurring processesIt allows the recurring processes to be searched.
Processes with waiting instancesIt allows the waiting processes to be searched.
Processes with running instancesIt allows the running processes to be searched.

After the processes are queried, the table on the right displays the scheduling information for the processes. This table contains one row for each schedule. If the process runs multiple times for a given schedule, the detail table should be displayed by clicking on the icon in the Instances column to get the details for each run.

Click the icon in the Parameters column on the corresponding row to display the starting parameters of the process.

To view the process runs, the detail table is displayed by pressing the icon in the Instance column. This table contains the start/end time of the process, which robot is assigned, and its status. For recurring processes under a schedule, this table contains multiple rows.

For the runs with the WAITING status, the waiting reason is shown at the pop-up window that appears when hovering over the icon under the Waiting Reason column.

The flow of processes is displayed in the window that opens by clicking the icon under the Show Diagram column. If a step in the flow is marked with blue border color, it means the step is completed successfully. If the border color is green, it means that the operation in this step is in progress. This allows you to follow the performed steps in the flow after the process is completed or while it is running. In addition, the window contains the values of the variables in the process on the table below.

A detailed log is created for the operations of each step in the process. These logs can be accessed from the window that opens by clicking the icon in the Show Logs column.

If the scheduled processes are to be canceled or paused, select the process run is selected and click the Select an action button. Then, Pause or cancel options can be selected from the drop-down list. If paused or cancelled, the process will not start even if the start time for the run is passed. If there are processes in waiting or running statuses before cancelling or pausing, these processes will continue to run or start to run when the start time is over. Thus, pause and cancel actions only apply to the process(es) that will be added to the queue afterwards.

1.2.1. Processes in WAITING Status

Processes in WAITING status are the processes that have not yet started running, even though the start time is over. The process may be in waiting status due to the absence of a suitable worker to run the process or the worker(s) on which the process can run might be busy running another process.
Processes in waiting status can be queried by selecting WAITING in the STATUS field, as shown in the first picture below. As seen in the second picture below, the waiting reason can be displayed by clicking the icon under the Instances column on the relevant row. If a process in waiting status needs to be canceled, select the process by clicking the checkbox next to it and click the Select Action button to list possible actions. Then, click the Cancel instance from the list to cancel a process. If the process priority is desired to be changed, click the Change priority from the same list.

1.3. Process Tracking on the Processes Page

Once the processes are running, they can also be tracked on the Processes tab. Unlike the Scheduled Process tab, this page does not include processes that are scheduled and have not yet started working on a robot. Therefore, the processes with WAITING status are not displayed here. As in the Scheduled Process tab, process flow and logs can be displayed by clicking on the Show diagram and Show log buttons after the process is selected.

By clicking on the filter icon on the tab above, inquiries can be made according to the status, process name, and running dates.

If the running is selected in the filter window, only on-going processes are displayed. To cancel a running process, click the Cancel process button on the page after the process run is selected. Therefore, the operation of the process can be terminated at any step if desired.

If any filtering is applied by process name or date, runs with different statuses are displayed. Failed process runs are indicated in red color.

1.4. Process Run Errors

Errors may occur at different steps in the processes while they are running. If the errors taken are not managed in the process (exception handling), the process run ends with an error status (FAILED). Process runs that are terminated with an error status are displayed by selecting failed in the filter window in the Processes tab.

When a failed process run is selected, the run details are shown on the right side of the page. The detailed error message can be checked here. The cause of the error can be understood by interpreting the process step in which this error message is taken. If the error message is not enough to understand why the error is caused, it is necessary to check the detailed logs.

By checking the flow of the process run, it can be determined at which step the error was taken. By clicking on the Show diagram button, the error definition and the step of the process with the error message can be seen. While successfully completed steps are shown in blue color, the color change is not observed in the error step.

To see the error details by checking the logs, click the Show Log button. The step that takes an error is again highlighted in red color. Log content includes which component received which error.

Robusta RPA User Interface Language Selection

Robusta RPA user interface works in English and Turkish. The choice of user interface language varies according to the language selection of the browser used to log in to Robusta Orchestrator. If the browser interface language is Turkish, the Robusta RPA user interface is in Turkish, and if the browser interface language is a language other than Turkish, the Robusta RPA user interface is opened in English.

Language Selection in Chrome Browser

  • To select a language in Chrome, select the Languages menu in the browser settings.
  • In the preferred languages section, the desired language is not in the list, and the desired language is added with the Add language button to add a new language.
  • After clicking the drop-down menu next to the language you want to make the browser language from the languages in the list, you can activate the View Chrome in this language option.
  • After restarting your browser, the language selection will be displayed in both your browser and Robusta RPA.

English Chrome

English Robusta RPA User Interface

Turkish Chrome

Turkish Robusta RPA User Interface

Browser Interface Language Selection Help Documentation

Chrome Driver Update

The browser driver used must be up to date.

Find out the Chrome Driver Version


  • The version of your Google Chrome browser will appear on the page

Download and Install the New Version

All versions of Chrome Driver can be accessed from this site.

https://chromedriver.chromium.org/downloads

  • Click and download the version suitable for your operating system.
  1. Extract the Downloaded File from the zip.
  2. Before moving the .exe file to the relevant location, it is necessary to close chromedriver.exe in your Task Manager.
  • Go to the folder where Robusta Worker is installed
  • C:RobustaWorkerCEdriver
  • Replace the downloaded file with chromedriver.exe

Opera Driver Update

The browser driver used must be up to date.

Find out the Opera Driver Version


  • The version of your Google Chrome browser will appear on the page

Download and Install the New Version

All versions of Opera Driver can be accessed from this site.

https://github.com/operasoftware/operachromiumdriver/releases


  1. Extract the Downloaded File from the zip.
  2. Before moving the .exe file to the relevant location, it is necessary to close chromedriver.exe in your Task Manager.

  • Go to the folder where Robusta Worker is installed
  • C:RobustaWorkerCEdriver
  • Replace the downloaded file with operadriver.exe

Start Chrome with Specific Profile

During the process, it may be required to open websites in a specific profile. The necessary settings should be pre-configured and saved in the profile.

To create a new Chrome profile: Click Here

Using Specific profile during the process


  • During the process, the necessary settings for the profile should be made and saved in advance.

Start Opera with Specific Profile

During the process, it may be required to open websites in a specific profile. The necessary settings should be pre-configured and saved in the profile.

To create a new Opera account: Click Here


  • Go to the directory where Opera is installed.
  • The default directory is: C:Users……….AppDataLocalProgramsOperalauncher.exe
  • Right Click on the launcher.exe file located in the relevant directory and create a new shortcut.

  • A new folder should be created under the C: directory for the profile that you want to edit and use.
  • C:OperaProfile

  1. Right-click on the newly created Launcher.exe shortcut
  2. Then, Click on Properties.
  3. –user-data-dir=C:OperaProfile is added to the end of the Target section.
  4. To save the changes, press the apply button and close it by clicking OK.
  • Open Opera using the newly created shortcut and make the desired settings (e.g. sidebar closed, VPN enabled, ad blocking enabled, etc.).

  • The directory address is written in the Profile Directory properties field within the Open component.
  • C:OperaProfile

Using "Functions" Activity

The “Functions” Activity under the “Applications” component can refresh the page in the previously opened “Open” Activity check whether a field exists on the page or find the number of rows in a table on the page.

Case Examples

With the “Functions” activity, it is possible to access the information on how many different currencies the daily exchange rates are given on the “TCMB” page.

*Application nameTCMBCurrencies*URLhttps://www.tcmb.gov.tr/kurlar/today.xml
*TypeChromeMaximize
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

*Application name${TCMBCurrencies}*Field
//*[@id=”kurlarContainer”]/table[1]/tbody/tr[position()>1]
Result Variable Namecount*Actionelementcount
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

Check “How to Find “Xpath”” to understand the “Field”.


Note

In this example, since the header is also considered a row, it is necessary to skip the first row in the Xpath. Therefore, Xpath should be written as:
//*[@id="kurlarContainer"]/table[1]/tbody/tr[position()>1]


The “Functions” activity can be used in cases where the page opened anywhere in the process needs to be refreshed and reloaded.

The “Functions” activity, it can be used in cases where it is necessary to check whether a field exists on a page.

  • For example, it can control an error message on a page in the process.

In this example, an incomplete entry will be made to check whether the error has appeared. In other processes, these fields can be filled in completely and a control stage can be created with the “Gateway” structure and progress can be made according to this control.

*Application nameFunctionsExist*URLhttps://uyg.sgk.gov.tr/vizite/welcome.do
*TypeChromeMaximize
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.
*Application name${FunctionsExist}*Field
//input[@name=”kullaniciAdi”]
*TextRobustaAcademy*Typetext
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.
*Application name${FunctionsExist}*Field
//input[@name=”kaydet”]
Wait until loadWait until visible
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.
*Application name${FunctionsExist}*Field
/html/body/table[2]/tbody/tr/td/table[1]/tbody/tr/td[2]
Result Variable Namecontrol*Actionexists
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.
Flow condition${control==true}
Default Flow
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.
Flow condition
Default Flow
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

Robusta RPA Database Connection and Query Guide

In this document, how to use Db activities is explained by using an exemplary process.

You can access to sample process by clicking here. A screenshot of sample process is down below.

Sample process is designed by using MySQL database management system (DBMS) to execute the desired database queries. You can find answers to questions like how to connect to MySQL from Robusta RPA and how to send queries. Even if sample process is designed for the MySQL database, you can follow the same steps for other databases. You can learn the relevant differences for other databases from documentation and apply those changes in your own processes.

1 – Connection

Open Connection activity under the Database component is used to connect to a database management system.

NOTE – Always check the connection to your database management system from a database management software before connecting from robot. Moreover, IP address of computer where Robot is installed must have access authorization to database. Robot cannot access a database management system that test connection is not established.

Open connection activity provides access to the desired database management system. Select the database that will be used from the Driver name list. Type the username information in the Database user and Database password fields. If the Database user field is used, the Database name should be left blank. The connection must be established with either the Database user field or the Database name field. A reference name is given to DBMS that will be connected to in the Connection name field and you will perform different processes later in the process, thanks to that reference name. In the Database URL field, idbc URL information is typed for MySQL.

NOTE – Even if Robusta product supports MySQL, Oracle, Cloudera, PostgreSQL, ibm.as400, sybase and Microsoft SQL Server, it works with all database management systems that have JDBC support.

  • jdbc:mysql://89.163.225.9:3306/ cloudrpa_learnRPA?serverTimezone=UTC&useUnicode=true&characterEncoding=utf-8
  • jdbc:mysql://localhost:3306/rpa_turkey?serverTimezone=UTC&useUnicode=true&characterEncoding=utf-8
  • jdbc:oracle:thin:@<hostName>:<portNumber>:<sid>;  (if there is sid)
  • jdbc:oracle:thin:@//<hostName>:<portNumber>/serviceName; (if there is oracle server)

2 – Execute Update

MySQL is a query language for establishing relationships between data. In Robusta RPA, the desired queries are sent through the Execute update activity.

The Execute update activity sends queries to the desired database management system. Its screenshot is on the right and its feature field is below. Type the query that will be sent in the QUERY SQL field. In this example, the query below is sent.

CREATE TABLE TBL_Training_NewTable
(
Registration_Number INT(10) UNSIGNED AUTO_INCREMENT PRIMARY KEY,
Location nvarchar(80),
Team_Lead nvarchar(50),
Company_Name nvarchar(50)
)

EXPLANATION OF QUERY

  • Create Table query creates a table in MySQL.
  • TBL_Training_NewTable, which is written after Create Table query, is the name of the table.
  • Registration_Number, Location, Team_Lead and Company_Name are the column headers of the table.
  • INT and nvarchar are the data types of the table columns. [There are different data types in MySQL. These data types are INT, smallint, tinyint, monetary (for currencies), char (string), varchar, nvarchar (string that is in every language) and binary etc.
  • The numbers in the parentheses are the number of characters. The possible maximum number is given. To establish a connection, the first table column is defined as primary key.
  • UNSIGNED AUTO_INCREMENT PRIMARY KEY is used to define that the defined primary key will be searched in order.

3 – Queries That Sent in Other Execute Update Activities

DROP TABLE TBL_Training_NewTableDeletes the specified table.
INSERT INTO TBL_Training_Company_Info VALUES (1, ‘Florida_Tallahassee’, ‘Nadia Diaz’, ‘A’)Enters one line of data into the specified table.
INSERT INTO TBL_Training_Company_Info VALUES (1, ‘Florida_Tallahassee’, ‘Nadia Diaz’, ‘A’),(2, ‘Florida_Miami’, ‘Max Melon’, ‘B’)Enters data in more than one line.
INSERT INTO TBL_Training_Company_Info VALUES (${RegistrationNumber}, ‘${Location}’, ‘${TeamLead}’,’${CompanyName}’)Enters multi-line output in a loop.
UPDATE TBL_Training_Company_Info SET Location = “Florida_Miami” WHERE Registration_Number = 1;Updates the data with primary key information (Registration Number) 1 in the Location column 1 to Florida_Miami.

4 – Execute Update

The Execute query activity sends the Select From query to the desired database management system. Its screenshot is on the right and its feature field is below. Select From query calls tables. In the Query sql field, the query below is used.

SELECT * FROM TBL_Training_Company_Info;This query assigns the table that is called by the query to a dataset that is defined in the Result dataset name field.

5 – Close Connection

The Close connection activity ends the connection with the database management system by using the reference name. Its screenshot is on the right and its feature field is below.

The use of Param or Parameters fields in the activities is not compulsory. Queries can be sent from Param or Parameters fields. If they are to be used, one of them should be used. In case both of them are used, the variables in the desired queries should be given. If the Parameters field will be used, the queries must be in JSON format.

Using Stored Procedures

DELIMITER //
Create Procedure subjects (IN S_Subject VARCHAR(25), OUT total INT)
BEGIN
SELECT count(subject)
INTO total
FROM student_info
WHERE subject = S_subject;
END //
DELIMITER ;

Procedure

The table named “student_info”

param1 : [“1”, “STRING”, “IN”, “History”]

param2 : [“2”, “INTEGER”, “OUT”, “@total”]

  • Once the parameters are defined correctly, all we have to do is write our query. The correct usage for this query is as follows:

Stored procedure : {call subjects(?,?)}

DELIMITER //
create procedure SHOW_SUPPLIERS()
    begin
        select name, address
        from student_info;
    end//
DELIMITER ;

Procedure

The table named “student_info”

Procedure call :   call SHOW_SUPPLIERS();

  • When the above query is made, the result that will return is as follows.
  • The parameters required while designing the process in the modeler are as follows;
param1 : [“1”, “RESULTSET”, “OUT”, “”]
query sql : { call SHOW_SUPPLIERS()}

Robusta RPA Components

This section contains the components and activities that you will use while designing your processes with Robusta RPA. The common areas in the properties of all components are given below. The features specific to the activity are on the pages of the activities.

Common Attributes

The attributes listed below are common characteristics of the activities. When designing the process, the field in the Name field can be named. The other field do not need to be filled in.

IdThe unique identifier of the item within the transaction model.AsynchronusIndicates the synchronous or asynchronous operating status of the item.
NameDisplayed name of the element in the canvas.DocumentationIt is a description and additional information about the item.

Diagram

The business processes are mapped graphically using the Modeler (Design Studio). For modeling the processes, end user or process developer uses BPMN-Diagram.

BPMN-Diagram

In BPMN, the processes are described using diagrams with a series of graphic elements. Such a visual presentation makes it easy for users to understand the logic of a process. BPMN has been primarily developed to design and read both simple and complex diagrams of business processes. For that, the BPMN standard classifies the graphic elements by categories: as a result, the elements are easily recognized by the users who work with business process diagrams.


Start Events

Start Events define where a Process or Sub-Process starts and to start a process, it must include one start event.


IdThe unique identifier of the element within the process model.
NameDisplayed name of the element in the canvas.
DocumentationIt is a description and additional information about the item.
Execution listenersListener of activity. Listeners are created at the start and end of activity.

Start event

Start event activity, also called Untyped start event or the None start event, defines where a process starts. Start event activity is the most common type of event. Processes that start with such an event are created without any pre-conditions. It is common to use this event when a human starts a process through a graphical user interface.


InitiatorInitiator of the process.
Form keyForm key that provides a reference to a form.
Form referenceA specific form name.
Validate form fieldsValidate the form fields. If you check the fields, set true in this field, otherwise set false.
Form propertiesDefinition of the form with a list of form properties.

Start timer event

Start timer event activity creates process instance on cyclic timer events, at points in time, after time spans or after timeouts.


Time cycle (e.g. R3/PT10H):Define the recurring time interval to start process at certain intervals or send multiple reminders for behind schedule user task.
Time Date in ISO-8601Define the timer with an ISO-8601 date definition.
Time Duration (e.g. PT5M)Define the timer with an ISO-8601 duration.

Start signal event

Start signal event activity starts process instance based on signaling across different processes. A single thrown signal can be caught multiple times by different catching signal events.


Signal referenceThe part of execution in which a signal is thrown and caught by intermediate events.
InterruptingSpecify whether or not all parent executions are terminated.

Start message event

Start message event activity starts process instance on receipt of a message.


Message referenceExecution in which one start event and one intermediate catching event state two message event.
InterruptingSpecify whether or not all parent executions are terminated.

Start error event

Start error event activity is used for catching named errors. This activity is only used inside of an event sub-process.


Error referenceReference name of error.
InterruptingSpecify whether or not all parent executions are terminated.

Start escalation event

Start escalation event activity triggers an event sub-process to start.


Escalation referenceReference name of escalation.
InterruptingSpecify whether or not all parent executions are terminated.

Start condition event

Start condition event activity checks if a condition is true and triggers event. It can be used as start event of an event sub process, as intermediate event and boundary event. The start and boundary event can be interrupting and non interrupting.


Condition expressDefine a condition expression for the conditional event.
InterruptingSpecify whether or not all parent executions are terminated.

Activities

Activities are the elements that actually do something in a process. The activities are defined as a Task.

Task: The smallest unit of work in a process, for instance, the prompt to fill out a form or a call to an external web service. Tasks are the most common type of activity. In essence, tasks are the elements that do something in a process.


User task

Usert task activity is a typical “workflow” Task where a human performer performs the Task with the assistance of a software application and is scheduled through a task list manager of some sort.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow, start and end event.
Multi-instance typeDetermines if multiple instances of this activity are created.
Cardinality (Multi-instance)An expression or numeric value (integer) that determines how many instances are created.
Collection (Multi-instance)The number of instances is determined by the elements of a collection. For each element in the collection, a new instance is created.
Element Variable (Multi-instance)The variable under which each element is available to the newly created instance.
Completion Condition (Multi-instance)An expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
Is for compensationA flag that identifies whether this activity is intended for the purposes of compensation.
AssignmentsDefines the assignee of a task. The assignee is the person who is responsible for the completion of a task. By default, the assignee is set to $INITIATOR which is a special variable that is set to the user who started the process. It is possible to set the assignee directly or through an expression. In both cases, the expected value is the User ID of the assignee.
Form keyForm key that provides a reference to a form.
Form referenceThe form associated with the User Task. Once a user opens the task, he or she is presented with the referenced form. It is possible to create a new form, reference an existing one or delete the current reference.
Validate form fieldsIf the form is submitted and validate form fields expression evaluates to true, form fields are validated on the back send according to the form model restrictions.
Due dateThe due date of the task.
PriorityAn integer number denoting the priority of the task.
Form propertiesSets the form properties.
Task listenersSets Task Listeners for this task

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

Start

End

Take

You can use the Multi-instance type as shown in the examples.

Default, only one instance is created:

None

Activities are created in parallel. This is a good practice for User tasks activity:

Parallel

Activities are created sequentially. This is a good practice for Service tasks activity:

Sequential

You can use the Cardinality (Multi-instance) as shown in the examples.

${number}

2

You can use the Collection (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

2

You can use the Element variable (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

elementvar

You can use the Completion Condition (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

true

${variable==True}

You can use the Expression as shown in the examples.

${firstName}

${clientService.createNewClient(firstName, lastName, email)}

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

resultvar

You can use the Skip expression as shown in the example.

${firstName}

You can use the Task listeners as shown in the examples.

Occurs when the task has been created and all task properties are set:

create

Occurs when the task is assigned to somebody. Please note that the Assignment event is fired before the Create event:

assignment

Occurs when the task is completed and just before the task is deleted from the runtime data:

complete

Occurs just before the task is going to be deleted or completed:

delete

Service task

Service task activity uses some sort of service, which could be a Web service or an automated application.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Set service task to be triggerableSets service tasks to be triggerable. This makes it possible that an external trigger determines when to continue the execution of the process once the Service Task was executed.
Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow, start and end event.
Multi-instance typeDetermines if multiple instances of this activity are created.
Cardinality (Multi-instance)An expression or numeric value (integer) that determines how many instances are created.
Collection (Multi-instance)The number of instances is determined by the elements of a collection. For each element in the collection, a new instance is created.
Element Variable (Multi-instance)The variable under which each element is available to the newly created instance.
Completion Condition (Multi-instance)An expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
Is for compensationA flag that identifies whether this activity is intended for the purposes of compensation.
ClassClass that implements the service task logic.
ExpressionAn expression which is resolved once the task is executed.
Delegate expressionService task logic defined with a delegate expression.
Class fieldsClass fields make it possible to inject field values into your delegated class.
Result variable nameThe name of the variable in which the result of the Service Task’s execution is stored.
Use local scope for result variablesIndicates whether to store the result variable as a local variable.
Skip expressionDefines an expression which is evaluated before executing the task.

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

Start

End

Take

You can use the Multi-instance type as shown in the examples.

Default, only one instance is created:

None

Activities are created in parallel. This is a good practice for User tasks activity:

Parallel

Activities are created sequentially. This is a good practice for Service tasks activity:

Sequential

You can use the Cardinality (Multi-instance) as shown in the examples.

${number}

2

You can use the Collection (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

2

You can use the Element variable (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

elementvar

You can use the Completion Condition (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

true

${variable==True}

You can use the Expression as shown in the examples.

${firstName}

${clientService.createNewClient(firstName, lastName, email)}

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

resultvar

You can use the Skip expression as shown in the example.

${firstName}

Script task

Script task activity executes processes that modeler or implementer defines a script in a language that the engine can interpret.


Script formatScript format of the script task that will be selected from combobox.
ScriptScript text of the script task.
ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow, start and end event.
Multi-instance typeDetermines if multiple instances of this activity are created.
Cardinality (Multi-instance)An expression or numeric value (integer) that determines how many instances are created.
Collection (Multi-instance)The number of instances is determined by the elements of a collection. For each element in the collection, a new instance is created.
Element Variable (Multi-instance)The variable under which each element is available to the newly created instance.
Completion Condition (Multi-instance)An expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
Is for compensationA flag that identifies whether this activity is intended for the purposes of compensation.
Auto store variablesAutomatically stores any variable defined in the script on the execution. Please note that some languages such as JavaScript do not support this feature.

You can use the Script format as shown in the examples.

Groovy

JavaScript

You can use the Script as shown in the example.

var today = new Date(); 
var a = new Date(today.getFullYear(), today.getMonth()+1, 0); 
var b = a.toString();  
execution.setVariable("tarih",b);

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

Start

End

Take

You can use the Multi-instance type as shown in the examples.

Default, only one instance is created:

None

Activities are created in parallel. This is a good practice for User tasks activity:

Parallel

Activities are created sequentially. This is a good practice for Service tasks activity:

Sequential

You can use the Cardinality (Multi-instance) as shown in the examples.

${number}

2

You can use the Collection (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

2

You can use the Element variable (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

elementvar

You can use the Completion Condition (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

true

${variable==True}
  1. To create a script;
    • Fill in the Script name, Script description, and the script content to be added using the “Script – Add New Custom Script” button.
    • Click on the “Save” button to save the script.
    • Access the added script from “Scripting Helper – JS Custom Scripts”.
  2. To edit a script;
    • Select the created script from “Scripting Helper – JS Custom Scripts” and click on the “Edit” button.
  3. To delete a script;
    • Select the created script from “Scripting Helper – JS Custom Scripts” and click on the “Remove” button.

Mail task

Mail task activity is used for sending mails to receiver in another process or Swimlanes. It is necessary to set up an email server via configuration since there is no mail server.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow, start and end event.
Multi-instance typeDetermines if multiple instances of this activity are created.
Cardinality (Multi-instance)An expression or numeric value determines how many instances are created.
Collection (Multi-instance)The number of instances is determined by the elements of a collection. For each element in the collection, a new instance is created.
Element Variable (Multi-instance)The variable under which each element is available to the newly created instance.
Completion Condition (Multi-instance)An expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
Is for compensationA flag that identifies whether this activity is intended for the purposes of compensation.
HeadersLine separated mail headers.
ToThe recipients of the email. Multiple recipients can be defined in a comma-separated list.
FromThe sender email address. If not provided, the default configured “from address” is used.
SubjectThe subject of the email.
CcThe CC (Carbon Copy) recipients of the email. Multiple recipients can be defined in a comma-separated list.
BccThe BCC (Blind Carbon Copy) recipients of the email. Multiple recipients can be defined in a comma-separated list.
TextText of the email in clear text. If HTML is not supported on the receiver’s end, the text version of the email is displayed.
HtmlContent of the email in the HTML format. This allows for the creation of rich formatting and the usage of images.
CharsetCharacter set to be used in the email.

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

Start

End

Take

You can use the Multi-instance type as shown in the examples.

Default, only one instance is created:

None

Activities are created in parallel. This is a good practice for User tasks activity:

Parallel

Activities are created sequentially. This is a good practice for Service tasks activity:

Sequential

You can use the Cardinality (Multi-instance) as shown in the examples.

${number}

2

You can use the Collection (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

2

You can use the Element variable (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

elementvar

You can use the Completion Condition (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

true

${variable==True}

Http task

Http task activity allows submitting and storing the results of a HTTP call.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow, start and end event.
Multi-instance typeDetermines if multiple instances of this activity are created.
Cardinality (Multi-instance)An expression or numeric value determines how many instances are created.
Collection (Multi-instance)The number of instances is determined by the elements of a collection. For each element in the collection, a new instance is created.
Element Variable (Multi-instance)The variable under which each element is available to the newly created instance.
Completion Condition (Multi-instance)An expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
Is for compensationA flag that identifies whether this activity is intended for the purposes of compensation.
Request methodRequest URL of the HTTP call.
Request URLRequest method to be used in the HTTP.
Request headersLine-separated HTTP request headers.
Request bodyRequest body to be sent, e.g., a JSON file.
Request body encodingEncoding of the request body.
Request timeoutRequest timeout in milliseconds.
Disallow redirectsDetermines whether HTTP redirects can be redirected.
Fail status codesList of Http response status codes to fail the request and throw a FlowableException.
Handle status codesList of status codes for which the task throws BpmnError which can be caught by a boundary error event.
Ignore exceptionDetermines whether exceptions are ignored and stored in the variable indicated in the response variable.
Response variable nameThe variable name in which the HTTP response is stored.
Save request variablesDetermines whether all request variables are stored. By default, only response related variables are stored as variables.
Save response status, headersDetermines whether response variables including HTTP status, headers etc. are stored. By default, only the response body is stored as a variable.
Result variable prefixA prefix that is put in front of the variable name of the result variables for easier grouping.
Save response as a transient variableDetermines whether the response variables should be stored as transient.
Save response as JSONDetermines whether the response variable is stored as a JSON variable instead of a String.

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

Start

End

Take

You can use the Multi-instance type as shown in the examples.

Default, only one instance is created:

None

Activities are created in parallel. This is a good practice for User tasks activity:

Parallel

Activities are created sequentially. This is a good practice for Service tasks activity:

Sequential

You can use the Cardinality (Multi-instance) as shown in the examples.

${number}

2

You can use the Collection (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

2

You can use the Element variable (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

elementvar

You can use the Completion Condition (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

true

${variable==True}

You can use the Request URL as shown in the example.

http://your-system.example.com/your-endpoint/${someVariable}

You can use the Request method as shown in the examples.

GET

POST

PUT

DELETE

You can use the Request method as shown in the example.

{‘clientId’: ${clientId}, ‘name’: ${name}}

You can use the Request timeout as shown in the example.

25

You can use the Fail status code as shown in the examples.

400

404

5XX

Status codes in handleStatusCodes override those in failStatusCodes when they are both set.

You can use the Response variable name as shown in the example.

responseVar

You can use the Result variable prefix as shown in the examples.

responseProtocol

responseReason

responseStatusCode

responseHeaders

responseBody

errorMessage

Decision task

Decision task activity executes Business rules encoded in DMN tables.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow, start and end event.
Multi-instance typeDetermines if multiple instances of this activity are created.
Cardinality (Multi-instance)An expression or numeric value (integer) that determines how many instances are created.
Collection (Multi-instance)The number of instances is determined by the elements of a collection. For each element in the collection, a new instance is created.
Element Variable (Multi-instance)The variable under which each element is available to the newly created instance.
Completion Condition (Multi-instance)An expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
Is for compensationA flag that identifies whether this activity is intended for the purposes of compensation.
Decision table referenceReference to the DMN table that will be executed.
Throw error if no rules were hitSpecify whether an error should be thrown if no rules of the decision table were hit and consequently no result was found.
Fallback to default tenantFind decision definition without tenant when previous attempts to find it with tenant field.

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

Start

End

Take

You can use the Multi-instance type as shown in the examples.

Default, only one instance is created:

None

Activities are created in parallel. This is a good practice for User tasks activity:

Parallel

Activities are created sequentially. This is a good practice for Service tasks activity:

Sequential

You can use the Cardinality (Multi-instance) as shown in the examples.

${number}

2

You can use the Collection (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

2

You can use the Element variable (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

elementvar

You can use the Completion Condition (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

true

${variable==True}

You only have to indicate a Decision Table Reference; the mapping of the variable is configured in the Decision Table.

Shell task

The Shell task allows you to run shell scripts and commands.


CommandShell command to execute.
Argument 1Arguments that are passed to the shell command.
Argument 2Arguments that are passed to the shell command.
Argument 3Arguments that are passed to the shell command.
Argument 4Arguments that are passed to the shell command.
Argument 5Arguments that are passed to the shell command.
WaitWait, if necessary, until the shell process has terminated.
Output VariablesVariable to store shell command output.
Error Code VariableVariable to store shell command error code.
Redirect ErrorIndicates whether the standard error is combined with the standard output.
Clean EnvIndicates whether the shell process inherits the current environment.
DirectoryDefault directory of shell process.
ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow, start and end event.
Multi-instance typeDetermines if multiple instances of this activity are created.
Cardinality (Multi-instance)An expression or numeric value determines how many instances are created.
Collection (Multi-instance)The number of instances is determined by the elements of a collection. For each element in the collection, a new instance is created.
Element Variable (Multi-instance)The variable under which each element is available to the newly created instance.
Completion Condition (Multi-instance)An expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
Is for compensationA flag that identifies whether this activity is intended for the purposes of compensation.

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

Start

End

Take

You can use the Multi-instance type as shown in the examples.

Default, only one instance is created:

None

Activities are created in parallel. This is a good practice for User tasks activity:

Parallel

Activities are created sequentially. This is a good practice for Service tasks activity:

Sequential

You can use the Cardinality (Multi-instance) as shown in the examples.

${number}

2

You can use the Collection (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

2

You can use the Element variable (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

elementvar

You can use the Completion Condition (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

true

${variable==True}

Structural

Structural is used for designing processes within processes and accessing the existing processes.

IdThe unique identifier of the element within the process model.
NameDisplayed name of the element in the canvas.
DocumentationIt is a description and additional information about the item.
AsynchronousIndicates the synchronous or asynchronous operating status of the item.

Sub process

Sub process activity is a graphical object within a process that contains activities, gateways, events and sequence flows. It can also contain sub processes.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Data objectsDefines the Data Objects of the process or sub process. Each data object is initialized as a process variable under the defined name.
Execution listenersListener of activity. Listeners are created at the start and end of activity.
Multi-instance typeDetermines if multiple instances of this activity are created.
Cardinality (Multi-instance)An expression or numeric value (integer) that determines how many instances are created.
Collection (Multi-instance)The number of instances is determined by the elements of a collection. For each element in the collection, a new instance is created.
Element Variable (Multi-instance)The variable under which each element is available to the newly created instance.
Completion Condition (Multi-instance)An expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
Is a transaction sub processIdentifies whether this sub process is type of transaction. A BPMN transaction is a set of activities that logically belongs together. Transactions can be canceled through the Cancel End Event and handled through the Cancel Intermediate Boundary Event.
Element index variableVariable name of multi instance characteristic’s counter.

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

The “Start” property indicates the moment when a process is initiated. When a workflow process starts, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to perform specific actions at the beginning of the workflow process.

Start

The “End” property signifies the moment when a process is completed. When a workflow process finishes, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to perform specific actions at the end of the workflow process.

End

The “Take” property denotes the moment when a flow transitions from one task or activity to another. Thus, when a step in the workflow moves to another step, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to manage data transitions or conditional operations between tasks.

Take

You can use the Multi-instance type as shown in the examples.

Default, only one instance is created:

None

Activities are created in parallel. This is a good practice for User tasks activity:

Parallel

Activities are created sequentially. This is a good practice for Service tasks activity:

Sequential

You can use the Cardinality (Multi-instance) as shown in the examples.

${number}

2

You can use the Collection (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

2

You can use the Element variable (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

elementvar

You can use the Completion Condition (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

true

${variable==True}

${dataCount==0}, ${dataExists==”true”}

You can use the Element index variable as shown in the example.

Counter1[/dire

A Sub-Process can only have one none start event; no other start event types are allowed. A Sub-Process must at least have one end event.

Collapsed sub process

Collapsed sub process activity hierarchial modeling for a high-level, end-to-end overview of the business process by enabling Sub-processes to be collapsed, resulting in hiding all details.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Data objectsDefines the Data Objects of the process or sub process. Each data object is initialized as a process variable under the defined name.
Execution listenersListener of activity. Listeners are created at the start and end of activity.
Multi-instance typeDetermines if multiple instances of this activity are created.
Cardinality (Multi-instance)An expression or numeric value (integer) that determines how many instances are created.
Collection (Multi-instance)The number of instances is determined by the elements of a collection. For each element in the collection, a new instance is created.
Element Variable (Multi-instance)The variable under which each element is available to the newly created instance.
Completion Condition (Multi-instance)An expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
Is a transaction sub processIdentifies whether this sub process is type of transaction.

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

The “Start” property indicates the moment when a process is initiated. When a workflow process starts, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to perform specific actions at the beginning of the workflow process.

Start

The “End” property signifies the moment when a process is completed. When a workflow process finishes, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to perform specific actions at the end of the workflow process.

End

The “Take” property denotes the moment when a flow transitions from one task or activity to another. Thus, when a step in the workflow moves to another step, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to manage data transitions or conditional operations between tasks.

Take

You can use the Multi-instance type as shown in the examples.

Default, only one instance is created:

None

Activities are created in parallel. This is a good practice for User tasks activity:

Parallel

Activities are created sequentially. This is a good practice for Service tasks activity:

Sequential

You can use the Cardinality (Multi-instance) as shown in the examples.

${number}

2

You can use the Collection (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

2

You can use the Element variable (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

elementvar

You can use the Completion Condition (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

true

${variable==True}

${dataCount==0}, ${dataExists==”true”}

Event sub process

Event sub process activity is triggered by an event and can be added at the process level or at any sub process level. Event sub process activity might be triggered using events like message events, error events, signal events, timer events, or compensation events. The subscription to the start event is created when the scope (process instance or sub process) hosting the event sub process is created. The subscription is removed when the scope is ended.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Execution listenersListener of activity. Listeners are created at the start and end of activity.

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

The “Start” property indicates the moment when a process is initiated. When a workflow process starts, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to perform specific actions at the beginning of the workflow process.

Start

The “End” property signifies the moment when a process is completed. When a workflow process finishes, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to perform specific actions at the end of the workflow process.

End

The “Take” property denotes the moment when a flow transitions from one task or activity to another. Thus, when a step in the workflow moves to another step, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to manage data transitions or conditional operations between tasks.

Take

Call activity

A Call activity identifies a point in the Process where a global Process or a Global Task is used. The Call activity acts as a ‘wrapper’ for the invocation of a global Process or Global Task within the execution. The activation of a call activity results in the transfer of control to the called global Process or Global Task.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Complete asynchronouslyExecutes the completion of the call activity in an exclusive asynchronous job. This is for example useful in combination with parallel multi-instance.
Execution listenersListener of activity. Listeners are created at the start and end of activity.
Called elementReference of a process.
Called element typeSub process type is an attribute that defines whether the sub-process details are embedded within the higher level process or refers (Reference) to another, re-usable process.
Input parametersAn optional input parameter map. Allows the mapping of parameters and variables which are then available in the newly created process.
Output parametersAn optional output parameter map. Allows the mapping of parameters and variables onto the original Case Work Item as the Human task’s Work Item completes.
Inherit variables in sub processInherit parent process variables in the newly created process.
Start the referenced process from the same deploymentChoose true if process that is started is in the same process. Choose false if the newest process definition will always be used. Default value is true.
Fallback to default tenantLook for the definition by key in the default tenant when current tenant search fails.
Process instance nameThe name of process that will be created.
Note: When this field is left blank, the default value is
“ProcessName_call_activity_Date” .
Inherit business keyInherit the business key from the parent process.
Business key expressionBusiness key of the newly created process instance. Can be an expression.
Use local scope for out parametersUse local variable scope for out parameters.
Multi-instance typeDetermines if multiple instances of this activity are created.
Cardinality (Multi-instance)An expression or numeric value (integer) that determines how many instances are created.
Collection (Multi-instance)The number of instances is determined by the elements of a collection. For each element in the collection, a new instance is created.
Element variable (Multi-instance)The variable under which each element is available to the newly created instance.
Completion condition (Multi-instance)An expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
Is a transaction sub processIdentifies whether this sub process is type of transaction.

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

The “Start” property indicates the moment when a process is initiated. When a workflow process starts, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to perform specific actions at the beginning of the workflow process.

Start

The “End” property signifies the moment when a process is completed. When a workflow process finishes, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to perform specific actions at the end of the workflow process.

End

The “Take” property denotes the moment when a flow transitions from one task or activity to another. Thus, when a step in the workflow moves to another step, this property can trigger an execution listener. It can be used to manage data transitions or conditional operations between tasks.

Take

Default, creates only one instance:

key

Creates in parallel:

End

You can use the Input parameters as shown in the examples.

Source: variablex

Source Expression: variablex is using for …. (any description)

Target: variablex

Target Expression: variablex is receiving from main process. (any description)

You can use the Output parameters as shown in the examples.

Source: variablex

Source Expression: variablex is using for …. (any description)

Target: variablex

Target Expression: Sending variablex to main process. (any description)

You can use the Multi-instance type as shown in the examples.

Default, only one instance is created:

None

Activities are created in parallel. This is a good practice for User tasks activity:

Parallel

Activities are created sequentially. This is a good practice for Service tasks activity:

Sequential

You can use the Cardinality (Multi-instance) as shown in the examples.

${number}

2

You can use the Collection (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

2

You can use the Element variable (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

elementvar

You can use the Completion Condition (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

true

${variable==True}

${dataCount==0}, ${dataExists==”true”}

Adhoc sub process

Adhoc sub process activity is a task group that exists to complete a part of process.


Completion conditionAn expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
OrderingIf the Embedded Sub-Process is Ad Hoc (the Ad hoc attribute is True), then the Ad hoc Ordering attribute must be included.
Cancel remaining instancesCancel the remaining instances for the adhoc sub process.

You can use the Completion condition as shown in the examples.

${variable==True}

${dataCount==0}, ${dataExists==”true”}

You can use the Ordering as shown in the examples.

Parallel

Sequential

Gateways

Gateways are used for controlling how the Process flows through Sequence Flows as they converge and diverge within a Process. If the flow does not need to be controlled, then a Gateway is not needed.


IdThe unique identifier of the element within the process model.
NameDisplayed name of the element in the canvas.
DocumentationIt is a description and additional information about the item.
AsynchronousIndicates the synchronous or asynchronous operating status of the item.

Exclusive gateway

Exclusive gateway is used for creating alternative paths within a process flow.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Flow orderThe order in which the outgoing flows are evaluated and stored in the XML representation of the process. The order of the outgoing flows is managed by clicking on the up and down arrows icon.

After using this activity, the desired conditions are entered into the flow condition field in the arrow.

${existResult==true}

${countResult==3}

${existResult==true && countResult==3}

${timecontrol.contains(“h”) || timecontrol.contains(“s”) || timecontrol.contains(“m”)}

To decide which route the process follows, the conditions on the outgoing Sequence Flows are checked. The conditions are modeled as an expression and must always evaluate to a boolean value of true or false. It is important to understand that the conditions of an exclusive gateway are not modeled on the gateway itself but rather on the outgoing sequence flows.

If more than one condition evaluates to true, the path that was defined first is chosen. This should obviously never happen. If no condition evaluates to true, the process is stuck.

There is the possibility to mark a Sequence Flow as Default Flow. If you do so, the flow follows this route if no condition matches.

Parallel gateway

Parallel gateway activity is used for synchronizing flows within a process flow and creating parallel flows at the same time. Contrary to Exclusive gateway activity, all conditions are calculated.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Flow orderThe order in which the outgoing flows are evaluated and stored in the XML representation of the process. The order of the outgoing flows is managed by clicking on the up and down arrows icon.

Parallel gateways are used to model situations where more than one path is executed in parallel. These gateways do not have any conditions since all paths are always executed. To join parallel branches, use another parallel gateway. The execution only continues once all paths have been completed.

Inclusive gateway

Inclusive gateway activity create alternative but parallel paths within a process flow. Contrary to Exclusive gateway activity, all conditions are calculated.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Flow orderThe order in which the outgoing flows are evaluated and stored in the XML representation of the process. The order of the outgoing flows is managed by clicking on the up and down arrows icon.

To decide which route(s) the process follows, the conditions on the outgoing Sequence Flows are checked. The condition is modeled as an expression and must always evaluate to a boolean value of true or false. It is important to understand that the conditions of an inclusive gateway are not modeled on the gateway itself but rather on the outgoing sequence flows.

Every time a condition evaluates to true or if a Sequence Flow has no condition, the process branches at that position. If no condition evaluates to true or if there is no Sequence Flow without a condition, the process is stuck.

To join inclusive branches, use another inclusive gateway. The execution only continues once all paths have been completed.

Event gateway

Event gateway activity represents a branching point in the Process where the alternative paths that follow the Gateway are based on Events that occur, rather than the evaluation of Expressions using Process data (as with an Exclusive or Inclusive Gateway).


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Flow orderThe order in which the outgoing flows are evaluated and stored in the XML representation of the process. The order of the outgoing flows is managed by clicking on the up and down arrows icon.

Event Gateways are used to model branches which are depending on the occurrence of two or more events. The process execution stops at the gateway and resumes once one of the events connected via Sequence Flow occur.

Boundary Events

Boundary event is used to keep track of activities. In other words, boundary event actively follow the activities whether there’s a some triggering event that can change the direction of the diagram. If the event occurs, the execution route of the process follows the outgoing sequence based on the boundary event. Boundary event activities can be attached tasks, sub-process or call activities


IdThe unique identifier of the element within the process model.
NameDisplayed name of the element in the canvas.
DocumentationIt is a description and additional information about the item.

Throw error

Throw error activity is used for throwing errors.


AsynchronousIndicates the synchronous or asynchronous operating status of the item.
*Error messageError message that will be shown.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

Boundary error event

Boundary error event activity catches error event and when it does, it destroys activity that error event is attached to and also destroys ongoing processes. Process follows the sequence flow of boundary error event activity.


Error referenceReference name of error reference.
Error message containsAllows the continuation of the desired flow depending on the content of the error message in an activity

Boundary escalation event

Boundary escalation event activity directs process to another flow by throwing and escalation and can be only attached to an embedded sub-process or a call activity, since an escalation can only be thrown by an escalation intermediate throw event or an escalation end event. When boundary escalation event acitivity is triggered by an escalation event from a call activity, then the defined output variables of the call activity are passed to the scope of the boundary event.


Escalation referenceReference name of escalation.

Boundary timer event

Boundary timer event acts as a stopwatch and as an alarm clock. When it’s time to execute the activity to which the boundary event is attached, a timer is started. When the timer fires (e.g., after a specified interval), the activity is interrupted and the sequence flow going out of the timer boundary event is followed.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow, start and end event.
Time cycle (e.g. R3/PT10H)Define the timer with the ISO-8601 cycle.
Time date in ISO-8601Define the timer with ISO-8601 date definition.
Time duration (e.g. PT5M)Define the timer with ISO-8601 duration.
Time End Date in ISO-8601Define the timer with ISO-8601 date definition.
Cancel activityProvides the activity cancelling.

Boundary signal event

Boundary signal event activity delays process execution until a particular signal is received. Signaling can happen across different processes.


Signal referenceReference name of signal.
Cancel activityProvides the activity cancelling.

Boundary message event

Boundary message event activity catches message on the boundary of activity or catches messages that are defined in message reference.


Message referenceReference name of message.
Cancel activityProvides the activity cancelling.

Boundary cancel event

Boundary cancel event activity is triggered when a transaction is canceled and interrupts all active executions in the current scope.


Boundary conditional event

Boundary conditional event activity is triggered if a specific condition is met.


Condition expressionDefine the condition expression for the conditional event.

Boundary compensation event

Boundary compensation event activity is used for partially failed operations. This event needs to be attached to the boundary of an activity.


Intermediate Catching Events

Intermediate Catching Events indicate that some triggering event happens that is triggered based on certain conditions during a process. Catching events activity waits for any triggering events to occur from the beginning, therefore, every start event activity is a catching event.


IdThe unique identifier of the element within the process model.
NameDisplayed name of the element in the canvas.
DocumentationIt is a description and additional information about the item.

Intermediate timer catching event

Intermediate timer catching event activity delays process execution until a certain point in time is reached or a particular duration is over.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow, start and end event.
Time cycle (e.g. R3/PT10H)Define the timer with ISO-8601 cycle.
Time date in ISO-8601Define the timer with ISO-8601 date definition.
Time duration (e.g. PT5M)Define the timer with ISO-8061 duration.

Intermediate signal catching event

Process execution is delayed until a particular signal is received. Signaling can happen across different processes.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow and start and end event.
Signal referenceReference name of signal.

Intermediate message catching event

Intermediate message catching event activity reacts upon the arrival of a message.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, a process, a sequence flow, start and end event.
Message referenceReference name of message.

Intermediate conditional catching event

Intermediate conditional catching event activity starts process according to some conditions.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, a process, a sequence flow, start and end event.
Condition expressionDefine a condition expression for the conditional event.

Intermediate throwing events

Intermediate throwing events indicate something that happens during a process. Throwing event allows another part of your process (Or a new process) to proceed or start. Therefore, every end event activity is a throwing event.


IdThe unique identifier of the element within the process model.
NameDisplayed name of the element in the canvas.
DocumentationIt is a description and additional information about the item.

Intermediate none throwing event

Intermediate none throwing event activity marks the occurrence of a particular event. Process execution is not delayed. In combination with execution listeners, this type of event can, for instance, serve as points to capture KPIs or other metrics.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, a process, a sequence flow, start and end event.

Intermediate signal throwing error

Intermediate signal throwing error activity event fires a signal. Afterwards it continues the process execution. Signals can be thrown either from the back end or using the Signal throwing intermediate event. One single thrown signal can be caught multiple times by different catching signal events.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow and start and end event.
Signal referenceReference name of signal.
AsynchronousIndicates the synchronous or asynchronous operating status of the item.

Intermediate escalation throwing event

Intermediate escalation throwing event activity throws a named escalation. This escalation can be caught by a boundary escalation event activity or an event sub-process with an start escalation event that has the same or none escalation code.

End Events

End Events indicate where a path of a process ends and must be added to the end of process to terminate.


End event

End event activity indicates the end of a process.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, a process, a sequence flow, start and end event.

End error event

End error event activity ends process in sub process in particular error state. If you want to catch this particular error you should use boundary error event in the boundary of sub process. “Error reference” must be the same in boundary error event and end error event.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, a process, a sequence flow, start and end event.
Error referenceReference name of error.

End escalation event

End escalation event activity ends the current path of execution and a named escalation is thrown.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, a process, a sequence flow, start and end event.
Escalation referenceReference name of escalation.

End cancel event

End cancel event activity triggers the cancellation of a transaction.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, a process, a sequence flow, start and end event.

End terminate event

End terminate event activity triggers the immediate termination of a process instance. All steps still executing in parallel branches are terminated.


Execution listenersListeners for an activity, a process, a sequence flow, start and end event.
Terminate allEnable to terminate the process instance.

Swimlanes

Processes in BPMN models are often wrapped in a so-called pool which is further divided into lanes.


IdThe unique identifier of the element within the process model.
NameDisplayed name of the element in the canvas.
DocumentationIt is a description and additional information about the item.

Pool

Pool, which uses a lane metaphor, places processes of a particular employee, workgroup or section on horizontal or vertical axis and provides clarity and accountability. This indicates the connections, communications and transition between lanes.


Process identifierUnique identifier of the process definition.
Is executableDetermines whether or not the process is executable. There can only ever be one executable business process per process model.

A Pool is the graphical representation of a participant in a collaboration. A participant can be a specific PartnerEntity (e.g., a company) or can be a more general PartnerRole (e.g., a buyer, seller, or manufacturer). A pool may or may not reference a process. A pool is not required to contain a Process, i.e., it can be a “black box.”

Lane

A Lane is a sub-partition within a process (often within a pool) and will extend the entire length of the process level, either vertically or horizontally. Lanes are a good way to organize responsibilities in a process. Often, a pool defines a process or an organization and the lanes represent departments. BPMN elements such as Tasks, Gateways etc. are then modeled within the pool that most matches that organizational unit. While this has no effect on most tasks, User Tasks can benefit from it.


Artifacts

Artifacts provide additional information that modelers add to bring a necessary level of detail to the diagram. Artifacts do not directly add any runtime behavior but serve to make the model clearer.

Text annotation

Text annotations are a mechanism for a modeler to provide additional information for the reader of a process.


IdThe unique identifier of the element within the process model.
NameDisplayed name of the element in the canvas.
DocumentationIt is a description and additional information about the item.
TextThe text of the text annotation.

Chatbot

A chatbot is an automated program that can interact with humans using natural language. Chatbots can be used as standalone services or software tools, as well as integrated into Robotic Process Automation (RPA) projects to be used in RPA processes. In RPA, Chatbot activity is a structure that allows direct interaction with users in an automation process. Chatbot activity enables businesses to manage their data and processes to quickly and efficiently respond to user needs. With a chatbot, not only can users receive answers to their questions, but document requests, information inquiries, and data entries can also be automated.

Wait Answer

The “Wait answer” activity allows the bot to wait after responding to a question or message from a user. In other words, after sending a response, the bot waits for a certain period for the user to make another input.


ExclusiveWhen it receives a special job from a specific process example, it makes jobs run in order.
Execution listenersListeners for an activity, process, sequence flow, start and end event.
Multi-instance typeDetermines if multiple instances of this activity are created.
Cardinality (Multi-instance)An expression or numeric value (integer) that determines how many instances are created.
Collection (Multi-instance)The number of instances is determined by the elements of a collection. For each element in the collection, a new instance is created.
Element Variable (Multi-instance)The variable under which each element is available to the newly created instance.
Completion Condition (Multi-instance)An expression that, if it evaluated to true, stops the creation of new instances.
Is for compensationA flag that identifies whether this activity is intended for the purposes of compensation.
AssignmentsDefines the assignee of a task. The assignee is the person who is responsible for the completion of a task. By default, the assignee is set to $INITIATOR which is a special variable that is set to the user who started the process. It is possible to set the assignee directly or through an expression. In both cases, the expected value is the User ID of the assignee.
Form keyForm key that provides a reference to a form.
Form referenceThe form associated with the User Task. Once a user opens the task, he or she is presented with the referenced form. It is possible to create a new form, reference an existing one or delete the current reference.
Validate form fieldsIf the form is submitted and validate form fields expression evaluates to true, form fields are validated on the back send according to the form model restrictions.
Due dateThe due date of the task.
PriorityAn integer number denoting the priority of the task.
Form propertiesSets the form properties.
Task listenersSets Task Listeners for this task
Skip expressionSkip an expression execution associated with task or association or not
CategoryCategory of the BPMN element

You can use the Execution listeners as shown in the examples.

Start

End

Take

You can use the Multi-instance type as shown in the examples.

Default, only one instance is created:

None

Activities are created in parallel. This is a good practice for User tasks activity:

Parallel

Activities are created sequentially. This is a good practice for Service tasks activity:

Sequential

You can use the Cardinality (Multi-instance) as shown in the examples.

${number}

2

You can use the Collection (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

2

You can use the Element variable (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

elementvar

You can use the Completion Condition (Multi-instance) as shown in the example.

true

${variable==True}

You can use the Expression as shown in the examples.

${firstName}

${clientService.createNewClient(firstName, lastName, email)}

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

resultvar

You can use the Skip expression as shown in the example.

${firstName}

You can use the Task listeners as shown in the examples.

Occurs when the task has been created and all task properties are set:

create

Occurs when the task is assigned to somebody. Please note that the Assignment event is fired before the Create event:

assignment

Occurs when the task is completed and just before the task is deleted from the runtime data:

complete

Occurs just before the task is going to be deleted or completed:

delete

Send Message

Send Message activity allows the bot to send a message, which may contain information, a response, or guidance for the user. It is used for scenarios where the bot needs to send a response or information to the user. For example, when a user asks a question or performs a specific action, the bot responds appropriately. The “Send Message” activity enables the bot to interact with the user and is used to control the flow of the conversation.


QueryThe query intended to be sent is entered into this field.
ResetReset intent.
EntityVariable in the process

You can use the Query as shown in the examples.

Enter your mail address

Enter your user name

You can use the Entity as shown in the examples.

mail

username

Prompt and Close

Prompt and Close activity involves the bot asking a user a question to initiate a conversation or complete a specific scenario. The bot asks a question to obtain specific information, provide options, or prompt the user to take a particular action. Based on the user’s response, the bot applies a set of logical rules and completes a specific scenario. After performing a certain task, the “Prompt and Close” activity concludes the conversation or transitions to another activity.


QueryThe query intended to be sent is entered into this field.

You can use the Query as shown in the examples.

Enter your mail address

Enter your user name

Whatsapp

Whatsapp activities allow Whatsapp operations to be performed. In order to perform the operaitons, it is necessary to use the Whatsapp business API and the phone number must be registered in that service.

Send text message

Send text message activity is used for sending message to anyone.


*Gsm noGsm that the message will be sent is written in this field.
*Text messageText message to send is written in this field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Gsm no as shown in the example.

01111111111

901111111111

You can use the Text message as shown in the example.

Hello, I will send the file.

Send attachment

Send attachment activity is used for sending attachment to anyone.


*Gsm noGsm that the message will be sent is written in this field.
*File nameName of the file to send.
*Base64Base64 string of image file.
File name asTo change the name of the submitted file.
Image captionImage caption, only valid for image file.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Gsm no as shown in the example.

01111111111

901111111111

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

C:RobustaTempQR.png

You can use the File name as as shown in the example.

C:RobustaTempQR1.png

You can use the Image caption as as shown in the example.

This is the image I mentioned.

Applications

Applications activities refer to the automation of the interactions of desktop, Java, SAP and web applications with elements of graphical user interfaces. All interactions with the user interface can be represented as input (sending or adding something to the application) and output (receiving something from the application). Examples of these actions are clicking a button and typing text in a text box or retrieving text from a browser page.

You can reach a how-to guide on Web Applications by clicking here.

Open

Open activity enables the opening or to be attached of various applications such as a web browser, Windows, JAVA, and SAP.


*Application nameThe reference name is given to the application which is desired to open in this field.
*TypeSelect type of application which will be opened or attached.
Application referenceReference id of application which is already running.
*UrlUrl address of webpage for web applications or window title information for some applications such as Windows and Java applications.
Wait until loadIf this checkbox is checked, it is waited until loading all elements of webpages or Windows.
Download directoryThe default download path which is desired is written.
Timeout (sec)Sets timeout period for checking visible or enable property of the element.
Default value is 15.
Profile directoryThe path of the profile folder is written. Chrome, Firefox or Opera profile allows you to maintain all of your browser details as apps, extensions, settings, browsing history, bookmarks, saved passwords, themes and open tabs.
MaximizeIf it is checked, the application window will be open maximised.
ArgumentsArguments, browser item reference.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Applications as shown in the example.

robustaWebpage

You can use the Type as shown in the examples.

CHROME

INTERNETEXPLORER

WINDOWS

FIREFOX

OPERA

OPERAATTACH

CHROMEATTACH

SAP

JAVA

JAVA_JAB

MSWINDOWS

MICROSOFT_EDGE

You can use the Url for Browser as shown in the example.

https://www.robusta.ai/

You can use the Url for Windows as shown in the example.

Untitled – Notepad

You can use the Url for SAP as shown in the example.

UAT-Robusta-SAP

You can use the Download directory as shown in the example.

C:Robusta

You can use the Download directory for SAP as shown in the example.

9080

You can use the Download directory as shown in the example.

C:Profile1

You can use the Timeout (sec) as shown in the example.

5

Mouse actions

Mouse actions activity allows mouse actions to be performed at the specified location on the application.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown.
ButtonClick type is chosen.
*FieldIt is the field where the location (XPath) of the area is written.
Double clickIt allows double-clicking on the desired area.
Wait until visibleIf this checkbox is checked, it is waited until visible all elements of webpages or Windows.
Wait until loadIf this checkbox is checked, it is waited until loading all elements of webpages or Windows.
HoverThe cursor is positioned on the relevant field.
X-coordinateIt clicks to the right or left of the XPath which is written in the Field as much as the given pixel value. Positive and negative values can be entered. Clicks to the right of XPath when using positive values, and negative values to the left.
Y-coordinateIt clicks to below or above of the XPath which is written in the Field as much as the pixel value given. Positive and negative values can be entered. Clicks on negative values below XPath when positive values are used.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Applications name as shown in the example.

${robustaWebpage}

You can use the Button as shown in the examples.

LEFT

RIGHT

NONE

You can use the Field for Browser as shown in the example.

(//input[@title=”Arama”])[1]

You can use the Field for Windows as shown in the example.

//Pane[@ClassName=Scintilla”]

You can use the X-Coordinate as shown in the example.

150

You can use the Y-Coordinate as shown in the example.

150

The above example use will do Left Double Click after the page and element is loaded to press the button whose location is given in the Field field .

Set methods

Set methods activity enables data writing to desired fields (Textbox, Combobox etc.) via browser or application.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown.
*FieldIt is the field where the location (XPath) of the area is written.
ClearIf it is necessary, it enables clearing the field before setting.
*TypeThe type of setting is chosen.
*TextFor the set operation, it is generally used over the Text. (When Type=attribute, the text field is not required)
Attribute nameIf “Attribute” is selected as an action in the Type property, the attribute name of the element to be used must be written. In the process of setting a title, the Title to be changed should be entered in this field.
Wait until visibleIf this checkbox is checked, it is waited until visible all elements of webpages or Windows.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Applications name as shown in the example.

${robustaWebpage}

You can use the Field as shown in the example.

(//input[@title=”Arama”])[1]

You can use the Type as shown in the examples.

Value and Attribute options can be used if the area to be printed text is a combobox and the desired text cannot be printed with the text method. Because on some websites and applications, it allows changing the values in the combobox only with attribute options. For this reason, setting up with the Text method does not work.

Title option should only be used if you want to change the title information of the site.

It can also be used as an alternative to the Text method in Keystroke.

Text is used to write text into the given content:

Text

It is used to change the value in the Html code for the entered location (Xpath) value:

Value

It is used to change the Attribute value in the Html code by specifying which Attribute value is desired for the entered location (Xpath) value:

Attribute

Used to change the title of the page that opens:

Title

It is a keyboard gesture. If the KeyStroke action is selected, the action desired to be performed on the keyboard is written in the text section:

Keystroke

You can use the Text as shown in the examples.

Coronavirus news

Coronavirus news for ${days}

${days}

You can use the Attribute name as shown in the examples.

Value

option

Home – Robusta

The value to be set in the text field can be both written with a variable and entered directly as text. If it is to be entered as text, it can be entered as robusta. But the value is to be sent by means of the variable, the name of variable must be between brackets ({}) and start with $. Let’s assume that robusta is assigned to companyname variable and we will call a variable to obtain the value of that variable, the variable name must be typed as ${companyname}.

Get methods

Get methods activity is used for getting data from the desired fields through the browser or application.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown.
*FieldIt is the field where the location (XPath) of the area is written.
*TypeTo get data, the appropriate action should be selected.
Attribute nameIf “Attribute” is selected as an action in the Type property, the attribute name to be fetched must be written.
*Result variable nameThe variable name is defined in this property to store the data received from the application in a variable and use it in the next process step.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Applications name as shown in the example.

${robustaWebpage}

You can use the Field as shown in the example.

(//input[@title=”Arama”])[1]

You can use the Type as shown in the examples.

It returns the given content as text:

Text

It returns the “attribute” value in the location (Xpath) information entered:

Value

It returns the value of this attribute by entering the desired attribute information in the entered location (Xpath) information:

Attribute

When the application is opened, it brings up the page title:

Title

It brings up the link when the application is opened:

URL

You can use the Attribute name as shown in the examples.

Attribute Name is not required for Title and Url option in actions.

Attribute Name is not required for Text option in Actions

value

name

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

getResult

Wait actions

Wait actions activity allows the desired element to wait until it becomes clickable or visible through the browser or application. In this way, clicking or setting etc. Processes are delayed according to the loading state of the element, not a fixed waiting period.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown application which will be opened.
*FieldIt is the field where the location (Xpath) of the area is to be waited for on the application.
*Wait forIt provides the selection of the wait action to be performed.
Timeout (sec)The sets timeout period for checking visible or enable property of the element.

Default value is 15.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Applications name as shown in the example.

${robustaWebpage}

You can use the Field as shown in the example.

(//input[@title=”Arama”])[1]

It waits until the field in the given XPath location becomes visible:

Visible

It waits until the field in the given XPath location becomes invisible:

invisible

It waits until the field in the given XPath location becomes clickable:

Enable

You can use the Timeout (sec) as shown in the example.

5

In the example above, until the element whose location is given in the Field field is visible, the next action will not be carried out and the element will be expected to be visible.

Switch actions

Switch actions activity allows switching between desired windows or frames through the browser or application.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown application which will be opened.
*Switch toThe option of the field that wanted to switch in the application or page is chosen in the dropdown.
*FieldIf the area to be transferred to is a frame, any field (XPath) in the frame must be written.

Note: If the “Switch to” property is selected as a “default window” or “default content”, the “Field” property can be left blank.
*TitleIf the “Switch to” action is selected as “Window”, the “Match” action should be chosen appropriately. The window title should be written “Title” field.

If the full window title is written “Title” field, the equals option should choose in the “Match” field.

If the starting of the window title is written “Title” field, the starts option should choose in the “Match” field.

If the ending of the window title is written “Title” field, the ends option should choose in the “Match” field.

If any part of the window title is written “Title” field, the contains option should choose in the “Match” field.
MatchThe desired option can be chosen when searching by title.
Retry CountThe number of attempts until the operation occurs is written, which can be any numeric value. Default value is 1.
Note: * The required fields may change according to the selected features.

You can use the Application name as shown in the example.

${robustaWebpage}

You can use the Switch to as shown in the example.

It allows switching between pages that are open more than one in the application:

Window

It allows to switch to frame within the opened application:

Frame

It provides the transition to the default main window:

Default Window

It is used to return to the previous content after switching to a Frame. In addition, although the elements to be accessed in some websites and applications cannot be in a separate window or frame, they still require access with the switch method. In these cases, the desired action can be performed by switching the content containing the element:

Default Content

You can use the Field as shown in the examples.

Since Xpath information is not required for Window, Default Content and Default Window options, the field can be filled with (*) character.

//*[@id=”google_ads_iframe”]

//*[@id=”Content-Language”]

You can use the Title name as shown in the examples.

Home – Robusta

You can use the Match as shown in the examples.

It is the structure used when searching by title.

The title name of the window to be switched must be written exactly the same:

Equals

It is sufficient to write a certain part from the beginning of the title name of the window to be switched:

Starts

It is sufficient to write a certain part from the end of the title name of the window to be switched:

Ends

It is sufficient to write a word that is in the title name of the window you want to switch to and is not found in other windows:

Contains

If the window you want to switch to does not have the title name, it should be selected:

Notitle

It enables transition to the next window that opens. When this actions is selected, it is not necessary to fill the title field:

Next

You can use the Retry Count as shown in the examples.

7

If a title is not written in the window to be switched, the “Match” property can be selected as “Notitle” or “Next”.

Next option switches to the window that opens immediately after the existing window.

Scroll

Scroll activity is used for moving the page up/down or right/left on the browser or application.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown application which will be opened.
X-coordinateSpecifies how many units the page movement will move along the X-axis.
Y-coordinateSpecifies how many units the page movement will move along the Y-axis.
*ScrollThese options are used for moving the page in any direction on the browser or application that is opened.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Application name as shown in the example.

robustaWebpage

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the example.

300

You can use the Y-coordinate as shown in the example.

0

Scrolls the screen downwards:

Down

Scrolls the screen upwards:

Up

Scrolls the screen to the left:

Left

Scrolls the screen to the right:

Right

Page movement is not used in two directions at the same time. The process must be done separately for each movement.

If you want to move the page up or down only, the Y-coordinate field should be left blank.

If you want to move the page to the right or left only, the X-coordinate field should be left blank.

Scrape data

Scrape data activity allows receiving data in bulk via a browser or application.

You can find the information how to use scrape function using winspy, please follow the link.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown application which will be opened.
*Scraper nameIt is the name of the dataset where the retrieved data will be stored.

Note: The data brought by the scrap method is actually kept in a dataset.
*TableThe location (Xpath) of the table is written in this field is written.
HeaderThe header part of XPath is written in this field.

Note: If there is no header for the Table, this field should be left blank.
First record headerIf you want to point out the first record to be scraped as a title, the Checkbox should be selected.
*RowThe row part of Xpath is written in this field.

Note: This XPath should represent all the rows in the table.
*ColumnThe smallest part of XPath which includes the desired data is written in this field.

Note: This XPath should represent all the cells or repetitive data in the table.
AdvertisementThe location (XPath) information of the advertisement button or pop-up (If any) seen on the page is written.
Wait (ms)The time required to wait during the scrap is specified in milliseconds.
Next pageThe location (Xpath) information of the next button of the table (If any) to be scraped is written. The provided XPath should not be found on the last page.
Initial popup clickInitial pop click locator Xpath.
PopupIf there is a pop-up on the page, the location (Xpath) information of the close button is written.
Max countThe maximum count of data to be scrapped is written.
HoverIf set to True, it scrolls the page down each time the data is scraped.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Application as shown in the example.

robustaWebpage

You can use the Scraper as shown in the example.

scrapeTable

You can use the Table as shown in the example.

(//table[@class=”unitTable”])[1]

You can use the Header as shown in the example.

thead//tr//th

You can use the Row as shown in the example.

tbody//tr

You can use the Column as shown in the example.

td

You can use the Advertisement as shown in the example.

//*[@value=”Adv”]/[text()]

You can use the Wait (ms) as shown in the example.

3000

You can use the Next page as shown in the example.

//*[@value=”Next”]/[text()]

You can use the Initial popup click as shown in the example.

@class=’siebui-popup-button’]/*[@title=’Pick Address:New’]

You can use the Popup as shown in the example.

@class=’siebui-popup-button’]/*[@title=’Pick Address:New’]

You can use the Max count as shown in the example.

10

Alert actions

Alert actions activity provides the management of the browser’s own pop-ups on the browser. In other words, it is for the management of the pop-ups belonging to the browser, not any pop-up that appears on any site.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown application which will be opened.
*ActionDepending on the request, appropriate actions are provided for closing or accepting pop-ups that are opened on the screen of the browser or application.

Note: The activity uses in cases if there is no XPath information available.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Applications name as shown in the example.

${robustaWebpage}

You can use the Action as shown in the example.

When a notification comes to the application screen, it accepts it and makes the notification screen close:

Accept  

When a notification comes to the application screen, it makes it close without accepting this warning:

Dismiss

Download file

Download file activity is used for downloading files with the help of the link address (URL) of the file to be downloaded in cases where there is no download button on any web page.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown application which will be opened.
*UrlSince the files do not have a download button, there is a link address in the HTML code section. It can be downloaded files using this link.
*DirectoryThis is the field where the directory to download the file to be downloaded is specified.
*File nameThe name of the file to be downloaded is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Applications name as shown in the example.

${robustaWebpage}

You can use the Url as shown in the example.

https://s0.shbdn.com/projeler/media/photos/Project/2017/05.png

You can use the Directory as shown in the example.

C:TempDownloadedFiles

You can use the Directory as shown in the example.

test.jpeg

Take capture

Take capture activity is the structure that allows taking image through the browser or application.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown application which will be opened.
*FieldIt is the field where the location (Xpath) of the area to be taken captured on the application to be worked is specified.
*DirectoryFor saving the image, the directory is written in this field.
File nameThe file name which will be created is written in this field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Applications name as shown in the example.

${robustaWebpage}

You can use the Field as shown in the example.

//img[@id=”capthcaimage”

You can use the Directory as shown in the example.

C:RobustaProjects

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

robusta.jpeg

Screenshot files are image files. For this reason, it should be named a suitable lay down (JPG, jpeg etc.).

Functions

Functions activity finds the occurrence number of a desired element on the browser or windows application (This element can be an image, a button or a text), checking whether the item whose location is given exists on the current screen. Also, it allows the refresh of the page (Refresh) within a certain field or entire page on the browser or windows application.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown application which will be opened.
*FieldThe location (Xpath) of the area where the action is desired is entered.
*Result variable nameThe variable name which stores the data obtained by the Functions activity is written.
*ActionThe desired action is chosen in the dropdown.
Retry CountThe number of attempts until the operation occurs is written.

Note: It can be any numeric value. Default value is 1.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Applications name as shown in the example.

${robustaWebpage}

You can use the Field as shown in the example.

(//input[@title=”Arama”])[1]

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the examples.

countResult

existResult

You can use the Action as shown in the examples.

It returns the number of elements of the given content. It is possible to have more than one element with the same XPath on the page. For example, it can be used in cases where the number of rows in the table is found:

Element Count

It is used for refreshing a certain area or the entire page:

Refresh

It checks whether the element whose location (Xpath) information is given exists on the current screen and according to the result, the result is true if there is an element, otherwise, it is false It is used for refreshing a certain area or the entire page:

Exist

You can use the Retry Count as shown in the examples.

7

Exists operation returns true or false only.

The result of the Element Count operation is returned only as a digit (in string format). (Eg: Such as 5, 3)

Run Script

This activity enables the execution of JavaScript code in the web interface.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown application which will be opened.
*ScriptScript to be executed, must be JavaScript
*Result variable nameThe variable name which stores the data obtained by the Run Script activity is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Applications name as shown in the example.

${robustaWebpage}

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the examples.

countResult

existResult

Browser navigate

Browser navigate activity is used to redirect the tab opened in the process to another site.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown application which will be opened.
Navigate urlURL of the site to be navigated
Navigate toNavigation direction is selected “forward” or “backward”
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.
One of the “Navigate to” or “Navigate url” features must be entered.

You can use the Applications name as shown in the example.

${navigateOpen}

You can use the Navigate url as shown in the example.

https://www.robusta.ai/

You can use the Navigate to as shown in the example.

forward

back

Close

Close activity, closes the browser or application in the given name to be closed.


*Application nameThe reference name of applications which has already been opened or attached is chosen in the dropdown application which will be opened.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Applications name as shown in the example.

${robustaWebpage}

Keyboard & Mouse

Keyboard & Mouse activities offer that simulate keyboard or mouse input that a human will use. There are also events that can set the focus to a specific window, minimize or maximize the screen or perform any action on it. These activities are necessary to create an automation that simulates human behavior.

While ending remote desktop connections, make sure that Capslock is turned off. Otherwise, on the next connection, Capslock will be turned on.

Mouse

Mouse activity is used for sending Mouse actions to the currently open screen, regardless of the browser or application.


*ActionSpecifies the mouse click type.
X-PositionThe location on the X-axis where the process will take place is entered. It can also be entered as a variable.

Note: The variables are used in ${} in Robusta RPA.
Y-PositionThe location on the Y-axis where the process will take place is entered. It can also be entered as a variable.

Note: The variables are used in ${} in Robusta RPA.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Action as shown in the examples.

LEFT_CLICK

RIGHT_CLICK

DOUBLE_CLICK

MOVE

You can use the X-Position as shown in the examples.

425

${xPos}

You can use the Y-Position as shown in the examples.

125

${yPos}

Drag drop

Drag drop activity allows you to click and drag a given coordinate area on the currently open screen to drop it into another coordinate field.


*Drag xThe location of the X-axis where the drag operation will be performed is entered.
*Drag yThe location of the Y-axis where the drag operation will be performed is entered.
*Drop xThe location of the X-axis where the drop operation will be performed is entered.
*Drop yThe location of the Y-axis where the drop operation will be performed is entered.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Drag x as shown in the example.

236

You can use the Drag y as shown in the example.

123

You can use the Drop x as shown in the example.

125

You can use the Drop y as shown in the example.

639

Keyboard

Keyboard activity is used for writing text to the application active on the screen via the keyboard to the desired area.


*TextThe text to be written in the desired field in the active application is written here. It can also be entered as a variable.

Note: The variables are used in ${} in Robusta RPA.
Press key after typingIt is chosen which key will be pressed after typing.
Wait after typing (ms)After typing, the information about how long to wait is entered.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Text as shown in the example.

Hello world ${result}

You can use the Press key after typing x as shown in the example.

NONE TAB ENTER

You can use the Wait after typing (ms) as shown in the example.

500

Hotkey

Hotkey activity is used for sending shortcut commands (CTRL + S, ENTER etc.) to the application that is active on the screen.


*HotkeyThe command information to be sent with the keyboard is written in this field. The command can also be entered as a variable.
Note: The variables are used in ${} in Robusta RPA.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Hotkey as shown in the example.

CTRL+S , CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER

Commands can be sent in binary or triple combination. While writing commands, the phrase “+” should be written between two commands.

BACK_SPACEALT3L or lNUMPAD2F10}
TABPAUSE4M or mNUMPAD3F11MINUS
UNDEFINEDCAPS_LOCK5N or nNUMPAD4F12QUOTE
ACCEPTESCAPE6O or oNUMPAD5WINDOWSKP_UP
HELPSPACE7Ö or öNUMPAD6SUBTRACTKP_DOWN
ALPHANUMERICPAGE_UP8P or pNUMPAD7ADD KP_LEFT
@PAGE_DOWN9Q or qNUMPAD8DELETEKP_RIGHT
:END;R or rNUMPAD9DELALT_GRAPH
^HOME=S or sNUM_LOCKALT_GR
!LEFTA or aŞ or ş+SCROLL_LOCKALT-GR
(UPB or bT or tSEPARATER&STOP
#RIGHTC or cU or u%*AGAIN
+DOWNÇ or çÜ or üDECIMALQUOTEDBLPROPS
),D or dV or vDIVIDE<UNDO
 E or eW or wF1PRINTSCREENCOPY
$.F or fX or xF2INSERTPASTE
/G or gY or yF3HELPFIND
~¨Ğ or ğZ or zF4METACUT
CANCEL|H or h[F5>SEPARATOR
CLEARéI or ıF6{ENTER
SHIFT0İ or i]F7n?
CONTROL1J or jNUMPAD0F8_ PLUS
CTRL2K or kNUMPAD1F9t

Key hold

Key hold activity allows holding down the ALT-SHIFT-CTRL keys on the keyboard and keying the characters that need to be typed with a shortcut on the keyboard.


*KeyThe key to being kept pressed or released is chosen in the dropdown.
*EventIf KEY_DOWN is selected, the key is kept pressed, if the KEY_UP command is selected, the key is released.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Key as shown in the examples.

ALT

SHIFT

CTRL

You can use the Event as shown in the examples.

KEY_DOWN

KEY_UP

 A key that is made KEY_DOWN should be released later with the KEY_UP command.

Clipboard

Clipboard activities are used to retrieve specific text from the clipboard or insert it into the clipboard.

Get from clipboard

Get from clipboard activity is used for retrieving specific text from the clipboard or inserting it into the clipboard.


*Result text nameThe Variable’s name to assign the data read from the clipboard is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Result text name as shown in the examples.

getVar

${Varname}

The data saved in the clipboard after any operation is taken into the process from the clipboard by giving a variable name. If the variable is already defined, the variable name is used as ${}:

${getVar}

Set to clipboard

Set to clipboard activity is used for writing text on the clipboard.


TextIt is the desired value to be written to the clipboard.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Text as shown in the examples.

Hello World

${getVar}

Clipboard to dataset

Clipboard to dataset activity is used for converting the text read from the clipboard into a dataset.


*New dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
*Has headerIt indicates whether the first line of the text document to be opened is a title or not. If the feature is selected, it means there is a title, if it is not, it means no title.
DelimeterThe separator character in the text document to be opened is specified.
*TypeIndicates the data type. Data types differ in structure and separators.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the examples.

clipDS

After exiting the data in the dashboard, it can be written to another field such as excel, csv with the name given to the data set.

You can use the Type as shown in the examples.

CSV_Default

CSV_Excel

CSV_InformixUnload

CSV_MySQL

CSV_Oracle

CSV_PostgreSQLCsv

CSV_PostgreSQLText

CSV_RFC4180

CSV_TDF

text

You can use the Delimeter as shown in the examples.

name; surname; age;

Data is written according to the separator of the data received in the set. Separators such as commas can be used.

Dataset to clipboard

Dataset to clipboard activity is used for writing the dataset to the clipboard.


*Dataset nameThe reference name of the dataset which has already been created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Has headerIt is indicated whether the first line of the text document to be opened is a title or not. If the feature is selected, it means there is a title, if it is not, it means no title.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the examples.

clipDS

Copy file to clipboard

Copy file to clipboard activity enables file content to be copied to the clipboard.


*File nameThe file path is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the File name as shown in the examples.

C:RobustaData.txt

Clear clipboard

Get from clipboard activity enables to clear content of the clipboard.


Excel

Excel activities provide methods for creating, extracting, and adding data to Excel workbooks and worksheets.

You can reach a how-to guide on Excel by clicking here.

Open Excel

Open activity is used for opening an existing Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name is given to the excel file which will open in this field.
*Excel file nameThe file path is written.
File passwordThe password is entered to open or modify the encrypted file.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

exampleExcel

You can use the Excel file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustaExample.xlsx

You can use the File password as shown in the example.

1234

Create

Create activity is used for creating an Excel file that did not exist before. Create process creates Excel and at the same time does the process of opening Excel.


*Excel nameThe reference name is given to the excel file which will create in this field.
*Excel file nameThe file path is written.
OverwriteThis checkbox enables overwriting if there is a file or folder with the same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

newExcel

You can use the Excel file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustaNew_Excel.xlsx

If the “Overwrite” checkbox status is:

True: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, it is not necessary to mark this field. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is changed by overwriting the old file/folder.


False: If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is not changed. The function gets an error with the message “There is folder already in the directory.

Save and close

Save and close activity is used for saving or closing Excel after the operations are performed in the Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*ActionThe desired operation is selected. There are three options, Save, Close and Save and Close. 
Excel file nameThe file path is written.

Note: If an excel file is desired to save as, write the name and path of the word file.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

newExcel

You can use the action as shown in the example.

SAVE

CLOSE

SAVE_AND_CLOSE

You can use the Excel file name as shown in the example.

C:New_Excel.xlsx

If you want to save Excel as a different excel, the Excel file path field must be filled.

If you want to perform both Save and Close operations, component should be used twice.

Copy

Copy activity is used for copying data in a specified range from an Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
DestinationIt can be determined from which cell the copied data will be written in excel.
Source excelThe excel reference name from which the data will be received is chosen in the dropdown.
Source sheetThe Excel sheet name which will be retrieved data is written.
RangeThe range of cells to be copied is given.
*ShiftSpecifies how to copy the dataset to the Excel file.
Copy as valueIt is the choice of copying the data to be copied with its values (without formulas).

Note: This checkbox will be important if there is a formula in Excel. If you want to hold the values you can copy the results as a value. If you do not check this box, you can lose the values.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Destination as shown in the example.

D1

You can use the Source excel as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:B5

You can use the Shift as shown in the example.

Copies the data to the current location that is already data:

NONE

Copies your data to a valid location by shifting the current data to the right:

RIGHT

Copies your data to the current location by moving the existing data down:

DOWN

Sheet name fields do not have to be filled if the first page of the excel files will be copied. Otherwise, it must be filled.

If there are two separate excels and if there is a copy operation between these two excels, the Sheet name, Source sheet and Excel name fields must be filled.

Remove

Remove activity is used for deleting the inside of a column or a cell in an Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
RowsThe row index is written.
ColumnColumn name or index is written. If it is wanted to delete more than one column, it is named a column number, column letter, or column heading by separating it with a comma.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

newExcel

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Rows as shown in the example.

1

To select multiple rows, use “:”

1:5

You can use the Column as shown in the example.

1

A

A, B

Sheet name field can be left blank if it is desired to operate on the first page of the Excel file. Otherwise, it has to be filled.

In Excel, rows begin with 1, columns begin with 0.

If you want to delete only a row in Excel, the column is left blank.

If you want to delete only a column in Excel, the row is left blank.

Remove duplicates

Remove duplicates activity enables to delete duplicate rows in any columns.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
RowIndicates on which line the remove duplicate operation will be performed.
ColumnIndicates on which column the remove duplicate operation will be performed.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

newExcel

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Row as shown in the example.

1

You can use the Column as shown in the example.

1

A

Sheet name field can be left blank if it is desired to operate on the first page of the Excel file. Otherwise, it has to be filled.

In Excel, rows begin with 1, columns begin with 0.

If you want to delete only a row in Excel, the column is left blank.

If you want to delete only a column in Excel, the row is left blank.

Format

Format activity is used for converting the specified column in an Excel file to the desired format.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
RangeExcel sheet range from which to fetch data is written.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
*FormatThe cells are formatted for dates, text, currency, and time using desired formats.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${formatExcel}

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:C5

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Format as shown in the example.

For date:

dd.MM.yyyy


For TC:

00000000000


For text:

@


For currency:

₺ #, ## 0; -₺ #, ## 0


For hours:

hh.mm: nn


These examples can be increased on demand or by using ready-made formats in excel.

Read excel to dataset

Read excel to dataset activity is used for converting the desired Excel file will be processed into dataset.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*New dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
RangeExcel sheet range from which to received data is written.
Has headerIf the dataset has column headings, true is selected.
Include Formatted TextIf it is desired to include formatted text in a new column, true is selected.
Set to nullThis checkbox provides the set cell values that are empty string to null.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

newDataset

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:C5

Sheet name field can be left blank if it is desired to operate on the first page of the Excel file. Otherwise, it has to be filled.
If the Range field is not filled, all of the data in the excel file constitutes the dataset range.
If no Destination is given, it is copied to cell A1.

Write dataset to excel

Write excel to dataset activity allows the changes to be written to the relevant excel file after the dataset processes are completed.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Dataset nameThe reference name of the dataset which has already been created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
DestinationIt can be determined from which cell the dataset will be written in excel.

If the Destination field is not filled, the dataset will be written its range directly into Excel.

Note: If the target range/area (Destination) is given and there is already data in the given area, that data will be written to the side of the dataset range.
*ShiftSpecifies how to write the dataset to the excel file.
Include headerIf there are column header in the resulting dataset, true is selected.
RowRows that will be written to the Excel.
ColumnColumns that will be written to the Excel.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

${newDataset}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Destination as shown in the example.

A1

You can use the Shift as shown in the example.

Copies the data to the current location that is already data:

NONE

Copies your data to a valid location by shifting the current data to the right:

RIGHT

Copies your data to the current location by moving the existing data down:

DOWN

You can use the Row as shown in the example.

1:5

You can use the Column as shown in the example.

1:5

The sheet name field can be left blank if it is desired to operate on the first page of the Excel file. Otherwise, it has to be filled.


If the Destination field is not filled, the dataset prints its range directly into Excel. If the destination is given and if there is data in excel in the field where it is given, that data moves next to the dataset range.

Copy/Remove sheet

Copy/Remove sheet activity is used for copying data in a specified range from an Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.

Note: When the “Action” property is selected as “Remove”, the “Sheet Name” field must be filled.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
*ActionThe desired action is selected.
Source excelThe excel reference name from which the data will be received is chosen in the dropdown.
New sheet nameThe name of new sheet to create in Excel is written.
Copy as valueIf the checkbox is selected, formulas in Excel will be copied as a value.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Action as shown in the example.

COPY

REMOVE

You can use the Source excel as shown in the example.

${copyExcel}

You can use the New sheet as shown in the example.

NewSheet

The sheet name field can be left blank if it is desired to operate on the first page of the Excel file. Otherwise, it has to be filled.


If Copy operation will be done in the same excel file, new sheet name and sheet name fields should be filled.

Source excel, new sheet name and sheet name fields must be filled in if copy operation will be done in different excel files.

Create sheet

Create sheet activity is used for creating sheets in an Excel file and it appends the newly created sheet to the end.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the page to be created in the excel file is given.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

NewSheet

Rename sheet

Rename sheet activity is used for changing name of sheet in Excel.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
*New sheet nameThe new name of the sheet is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the New sheet name as shown in the example.

newSheet

List sheets

List sheets activity allows transferring the worksheets in the Excel file to the dataset.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*New dataset nameThe reference name of the dataset that will be created is given.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the New dataset file name as shown in the example.

listDataset

If the dataset is written to the excel file, it will appear as below.

Save sheet as pdf

Save sheet as pdf activity allows the pages in an Excel file to be saved as PDF.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Pdf nameThe pdf file name is written.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
All sheetsIf all worksheets in Excel will be saved as pdf, this field is selected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Pdf name file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustanewExcel_to_PDF.pdf

You can use the Sheet name file name as shown in the example

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

Clear sheet

Clear sheet activity performs the process of deleting a page in an Excel file or the desired area in the page.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameName of the sheet to work in Excel, if not added it takes the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
RangeExcel sheet range from which to clear data is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name file name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Range name as shown in the example

A1:C5

If it is desired to delete a certain range in the page rather than a page in the Excel file, the range is given. If the range is not given, the entire sheet is deleted.

If the first page of the excel files will be processed, the sheet name fields do not have to be filled. Otherwise, it must be filled.

Pivot

Pivot activity is used for pivot operations that will be done in an Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Source sheetThe Excel sheet name which includes data for the pivot is written.
RangeThe information for the range to be pivoted is given.
Sheet nameThe name of that sheet is given to show the result of the Pivot operation on a blank Excel sheet or a newly created Excel sheet.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
DestinationIt can be determined from which cell the pivoted data will be written in excel.

Note: If no destination is given, the copy is made to cell A1.
ColumnsIt gives which columns will consist of in the pivot operation.
RowsIt gives which rows will consist of in the pivot operation.
ValuesThe desired action is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${pivotExcel}

You can use the Source sheet as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:B3

A:A

A:H

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Pivot

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Destination as shown in the example.

A1

You can use the Columns as shown in the examples.

A

A,B

You can use the Rows as shown in the example.

B

You can use the Values as shown in the examples.

SUM(C)

COUNT(C),AVERAGE(C)

Supported functions:

AVERAGE

COUNT

COUNT_NUMS

MAX

MIN

PRODUCT

STD_DEV

STD_DEVP

SUM

VAR

VARP

If the first page of the excel files will be pivoted, the source sheet field does not have to be filled. Otherwise, it must be filled.
If no Destination is given, it is copied to cell A1.
If Range is not given, the entire range in the Excel file is taken.
If there is more than one table or different data in the sheet, the “Range” field should be filled.
Excel file that contains different columns with the same name, errors can occur during pivot operations. In this case, the column names should be changed.

Get row as json

Get row as json activity allows to create a variable in JSON format of a row in the excel.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
RowRow index.
*Result variable nameVariable name of the return value.
*Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Row as shown in the example.

0

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

getJSON

Hide or show

Hide or show activity is used for hiding or showing a column or a row in an Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
ActionHide and show action is chosen rows or columns.
RowsIt is written which row will be shown or hidden.
ColumsIt is written which columns will be shown or hidden.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name file name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Action as shown in the example.

HIDE

SHOW

You can use the Rows as shown in the example.

1

1:5

You can use the Rows as shown in the example.

1

1:4

If the Row field is left blank, it will perform the operation for the whole column.

Set cell style

Set cell style activity is used for formatting the cell styles of the desired ranges in the worksheet of an Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
RangeThe range of cells to be changed data is given.
Fill colorThe background color of the cell is written as RGB values or the name of the color.
Font colorThe text color is written as RGB values or the name of the color.
BoldThis checkbox provides changing the font thickness.
ItalicThis checkbox provides italicization.
UnderlineThis checkbox provides underlining.
Font sizeThe font size is adjusted. The desired font number is written in this area.
Font nameThe font type is written.
Wrap text?Wrap text is the automatic adjustment of text to fit within a confined space, such as a cell or text box, by breaking the text into multiple lines
Has border?Whether borders (Frame) will be present or not is selected.
Border styleThe border style that will be applied is selected.
Border position?The position of the border that will be applied is selected.
Border colorThe border color of the cells is is written as RGB values or the name of the color.
Vertical alignmentVertical alignment of the cells.
Horizontal alignmentHorizontal alignment of the cells.
Is hyperlink?This checkbox provides converting text to hyperlink.
UrlThis textbox provides url value to be converted to hyperlink.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name file name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1

A1:B5

You can use the Font color file name as shown in the example.

255,0,0 (Red)

255,255,0 (Yellow)

You can use the Font size as shown in the example.

9

You can use the Font name as shown in the example.

Arial

You can use the Border style as shown in the examples.

NONE

THIN

MEDIUM

DASHED

DOTTED

THICK

DOUBLE

You can use the Border position as shown in the examples.

ALL

NONE

TOP

BOTTOM

LEFT

RIGHT

You can use the Border color as shown in the examples.

yellow

255,56,180

You can use the Vertical alignment as shown in the examples.

NONE

TOP

CENTER

BOTTOM

JUSTIFY

DISTRIBUTED

You can use the Horizontal alignment as shown in the examples.

NONE

GENERAL

LEFT

CENTER

RIGHT

FILL

JUSTIFY

CENTER_SELECTION

DISTRIBUTED

Remove cell style

Remove cell style activity is used for removing style of cell in Excel.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
RangeThe range of cells to be removing style is given.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:D7

The sheet name field can be left blank if it is desired to operate on the first page of the Excel file. Otherwise, it has to be filled.
If the Range field is not filled, all of the data in the excel file constitutes the dataset range.

Set formula

Set formula activity is used for replacing formulas in a specified cell or range in an Excel file. If there is no formula in the cell, it cannot be used for new formula assignment.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
RangeThe range of cells to be received is given.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
FormulaExcel formula is written without ‘=’ at the beginning.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1

A1:C5

You can use the Sheet name file name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Formula as shown in the example.

SUM(A1:B1)

Find and replace

“Find and replace” activity is used to find a specific word or phrase within an Excel file, text, or file and then replace it with a desired word or phrase.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the Excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*New dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be created
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
RangeExcel sheet range from which to fetch data is written.
*Find whatString that is searched for and will be replaced.
*Replace withNew string that will be replaced with.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${formatExcel}

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

TestDataset

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:C5

You can use the Find what as shown in the example.

RPA

You can use the Replace with as shown in the example.

RobustaRPA

Autofit rows/columns

Autofit rows/columns activity is used to fit the entries in rows and columns automatically.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
RowsThe row index is written (Starts from 1).
ColumnsThe column name or index is written (Starts from 1).
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Rows as shown in the example.

1

1:5

You can use the Columns as shown in the example.

A1

A1:B5

1

1:5

Merge/unmerge cells

Merge/unmerge cells activity is used for merging and unmerging cells in Excel.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
RangeThe Excel sheet range for the merge or unmerge is written.
Merge cells?If it is desired to merge, this checkbox is selected. If it is desired to unmerge, this checkbox is not selected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:D7

Sheet name field can be left blank if it is desired to operate on the first page of the Excel file. Otherwise, it has to be filled.
If the Range field is not filled, all of the data in the excel file constitutes the dataset range.

MS Excel

MS Excel activities provide methods for creating, extracting, and adding data to excel workbooks and worksheets in MS Excel.

Open

Open activity is used for opening an existing Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name is given to the excel file which will open in this field.
*Excel file nameThe file path is written.
VisibleOffers the option of whether the excel file is visible or not.

Possible Values:
true: The Excel application window will be visible, active, and maximized on the screen.
false: The Excel application will run in the background, and the window will not be displayed to the user.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

exampleExcel

You can use the Excel file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustaExample.xlsx

Create

Create activity is used for creating a new Excel file. It creates Excel file and at the same time does the process of opening Excel.


*Excel nameThe reference name is given to the excel file which will create in this field.
*Excel file nameThe file path is written.
OverwriteThis checkbox enables overwriting if there is a file or folder with the same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

newExcel

You can use the Excel file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustaNew_Excel.xlsx

If the “Overwrite” field’s checkbox status is:

True: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, a name change is made. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is changed by overwriting the old file/folder.


False: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, a name change is made. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is not changed. The function gets an error with the message There is folder already in the directory.

Close


Close activity is used for closing Excel after the operations are performed in the Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

newExcel

Save

Save activity is used for “save”, “save as” or “save as and close” and “save and close” Excel after the operations are performed in the Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*ActionThe desired operation is selected. There are three options, Save, Save as, Save as and Close and Save and Close. 
Excel file nameThe file path is written.

Note: If an excel file is desired to save as, write the name and path of the word file.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

newExcel

You can use the action as shown in the example.

SAVE

SAVE AS

SAVE_AS_AND_CLOSE

SAVE_AND_CLOSE

You can use the Excel file name as shown in the example.

C:New_Excel.xlsx

Copy

Copy activity is used for copying data in a specified range from an Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
DestinationIt can be determined from which cell the copied data will be written in excel.
Source sheetThe Excel sheet name which will be retrieved data is written.
RangeThe range of cells to be copied is given.
*ShiftSpecifies how to copy the dataset to the Excel file.
Copy as valueIt is the choice of copying the data to be copied with its values (without formulas).

Note: This checkbox will be important if there is a formula in Excel. If you want to hold the values you can copy the results as a value. If you do not check this box, you can lose the values.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Destination as shown in the example.

D1

You can use the Source excel as shown in the example.

Sheet2

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:B5

You can use the Shift as shown in the examples.

Copies the data to current location that has already data:

NONE

Copies your data to current place by moving the existing data to the right:

RIGHT

Copies your data to current location by moving the existing data down:

DOWN

Sheet name fields do not have to be filled if the first page of the excel files will be copied. Otherwise it must be filled.

Remove duplicates

Remove duplicates activity enables to delete duplicate rows in any columns.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
RowIndicates on which line the remove duplicate operation will be performed.
ColumnIndicates on which column the remove duplicate operation will be performed.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

newExcel

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Row as shown in the example.

1

You can use the Column as shown in the example.

1

A

Sheet name field can be left blank if it is desired to operate on the first page of the Excel file. Otherwise, it has to be filled.

In Excel, rows 1, columns begin with 0.

If you want to delete only the column in Excel, the row is left blank.

Read excel to dataset

Read excel to dataset activity is used for converting the desired Excel file will be processed into dataset.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*New dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
RangeExcel sheet range from which to received data is written.
Has headerIf the dataset has column headings, true is selected.
Include Formatted TextIf it is desired to include formatted text in a new column, true is selected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

newDataset

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:C5

Write dataset to excel

Write dataset to excel activity allows the changes to be written to the relevant Excel file after the dataset processes are completed.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Dataset nameThe reference name of the dataset which has already been created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
DestinationIt can be determined from which cell the dataset will be written in excel.

If the Destination field is not filled, the dataset will be written its range directly into Excel.

Note: If the target range/area (Destination) is given and there is already data in the given area, that data will be written to the side of the dataset range.
*ShiftSpecifies how to write the dataset to the excel file.
Include headerIf there are column header in the resulting dataset, true is selected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

${newDataset}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Destination as shown in the example.

A1

You can use the Shift as shown in the example.

Copies the data to current location that has already data:

NONE

Copies your data to current place by moving the existing data to the right:

RIGHT

Copies your data to current location by moving the existing data down:

DOWN

Create sheet

Create sheet activity is used for creating sheets in an Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the page to be created in the excel file is given.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

NewSheet

Hide or Show

Hide or show activity is used for hiding or showing a column or a row in an MS Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in MS Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in MS Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
ActionHide and show action is chosen rows or columns.
RowsIt is written which row will be shown or hidden.
ColumsIt is written which columns will be shown or hidden.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name file name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Action as shown in the example.

HIDE

SHOW

You can use the Rows as shown in the example.

1

1:5

You can use the Rows as shown in the example.

1

1:4

If the Row field is left blank, it will perform the operation for the whole column.

Format

Format activity is used for converting the specified column in an Excel file to the desired format.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the MS Excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
RangeExcel sheet range from which to fetch data is written.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in MS Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in MS Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
*FormatThe cells are formatted for dates, text, currency, and time using desired formats.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${formatExcel}

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:C5

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Format as shown in the example.

For date:

dd.MM.yyyy


For TC:

00000000000


For text:

@


For currency:

₺ #, ## 0; -₺ #, ## 0


For hours:

hh.mm: nn


These examples can be increased on demand or by using ready-made formats in excel.

Find and replace

“Find and replace” activity is used to find a specific word or phrase within a MS Excel file, text, or file and then replace it with a desired word or phrase.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the MS Excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*New dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be created
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in MS Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
RangeExcel sheet range from which to fetch data is written.
*Find whatString that is searched for and will be replaced.
*Replace withNew string that will be replaced with.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${formatExcel}

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

TestDataset

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:C5

You can use the Find what as shown in the example.

RPA

You can use the Replace with as shown in the example.

RobustaRPA

Set Formula

Set formula activity is used for replacing formulas in a specified cell or range in an MS Excel file. If there is no formula in the cell, it cannot be used for new formula assignment.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
RangeThe range of cells to be received is given.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in MS Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
Sheet indexIndex of the sheet to work in MS Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
FormulaExcel formula is written without ‘=’ at the beginning.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1

A1:C5

You can use the Sheet name file name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Sheet index as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Formula as shown in the example.

SUM(A1:B1)

Run macro

Run macro activity is used for running macros.


*Excel nameThe name of the Excel file that was opened or created before is selected.
*Macro nameThe name of macro that will be run in Excel.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Run macro as shown in the example.

runMacro

Pivot

Pivot activity is used for pivot operations that will be done in an Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Source sheetThe Excel sheet name which includes data for the pivot is written.
RangeThe information for the range to be pivoted is given.
Sheet nameThe name of that sheet is given to show the result of the Pivot operation on a blank Excel sheet or a newly created Excel sheet.
DestinationIt can be determined from which cell the pivoted data will be written in excel.

Note: If no destination is given, the copy is made to cell A1.
ColumnsIt gives which columns will consist of in the pivot operation.
RowsIt gives which rows will consist of in the pivot operation.
ValuesThe desired action is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${pivotExcel}

You can use the Source sheet as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:B3

A:A

A:H

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Pivot

You can use the Destination as shown in the example.

A1

You can use the Columns as shown in the examples.

A

A,B

You can use the Rows as shown in the example.

B

A,B

You can use the Values as shown in the examples.

SUM(C)

COUNT(C),AVERAGE(C)

Supported functions:

AVERAGE

COUNT

COUNT_NUMS,

MAX

MIN

PRODUCT

STD_DEV

STD_DEVP

SUM

VAR

VARP

If the first page of the excel files will be pivoted, the source sheet field does not have to be filled. Otherwise, it must be filled.
If no Destination is given, it is copied to cell A1.
If Range is not given, the entire range in the Excel file is taken.

Refresh pivot table

Refresh pivot table is used for refreshing pivot tables in MS Excel.


*Excel nameReference name of Excel which will be opened.
Sheet nameName of the sheet to work in Excel. If not added, it takes the first sheet by default.
*Pivot nameName of the pivot table that will be refreshed in MS Excel.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Pivot name as shown in the example.

pivot1

List sheets

List sheets activity allows transferring the worksheets in the Excel file to the dataset.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*New dataset nameThe reference name of the dataset that will be created is given.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the New dataset file name as shown in the example.

listDataset

If the dataset is written to the excel file, it will appear as below.

Save sheet as pdf

Save sheet as pdf activity allows the pages in an Excel file to be saved as PDF.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Pdf nameThe pdf file name is written.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.
All sheetsIf all worksheets in Excel will be saved as pdf, this field is selected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Pdf name file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustanewExcel_to_PDF.pdf

You can use the Sheet name file name as shown in the example

Sheet1

Clear sheet

Clear sheet activity performs the process of deleting a page in an Excel file or the desired area in the page.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameName of the sheet to work in Excel, if not added it takes the first sheet by default.
RangeExcel sheet range from which to clear data is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name file name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Range name as shown in the example

A1:C5

If it is desired to delete a certain range in the page rather than a page in the Excel file, the range is given. If the range is not given, the entire inside of the sheet is deleted.

If the first page of the excel files will be processed, the sheet name fields do not have to be filled. Otherwise, it must be filled.

Copy/Remove sheet

Copy/Remove sheet activity is used for copying data in a specified range from an Excel file.


*Excel nameThe reference name of the excel file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameThe name of the sheet to work in Excel can be added. If not added, it is accepted as the first sheet by default.

Note: When the “Action” property is selected as “Remove”, the “Sheet Name” field must be filled.
*ActionThe desired action is selected.
New sheet nameThe name of new sheet to create in Excel is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Excel name as shown in the example.

${newExcel}

You can use the Sheet name as shown in the example.

Sheet1

You can use the Action as shown in the example.

COPY

REMOVE

You can use the New sheet as shown in the example.

NewSheet

Google Sheet

Open

The “Open” activity is used to open a Google Sheet file.


*Google sheet nameThe reference name of the google sheet which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Google sheet url addressURL address of the page to be accessed.
*Credential filePre-authorized user credentials
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Google Sheet name as shown in the example.

newGoogleSheet

.

Read google sheet to dataset

The “Read google sheet to dataset” activity is used to import the specified Google Sheet file into a dataset.


*Google sheet nameThe reference name of the google sheet which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*New dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Sheet nameA page or tab name within a spreadsheet. If not included, it defaults to the first page.
RangeCell range, e.g: A1:C2
Has headerIf there are column headings in the dataset, check the box.
Include formatted textThe values will be calculated and formatted in the response according to the format of the cell.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Google sheet name as shown in the example.

${newGoogleSheet}

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

List sheets

The “List Sheets” activity retrieves a list of all sheet names within a specified Google Sheets document.


*Google sheet nameThe reference name of the google sheet which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*New dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Google Sheet name as shown in the example.

GoogleSheet

.

Get spreadsheet info

The “Get Spreadsheet Info” activity retrieves metadata and structural information about a specified Google Sheets document.


*Google sheet nameThe reference name of the google sheet which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Result variable nameResult variable name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Google Sheet name as shown in the example.

newGoogleSheet

.

Create sheet

The “Create Sheet” activity adds a new sheet to an existing Google Sheets document. This activity allows you to specify the name of the new sheet and optionally set its position within the document.


*Google sheet nameThe reference name of the google sheet which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Sheet nameName of the sheet.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Google Sheet name as shown in the example.

GoogleSheet

.

Create spreadsheet

The “Create Spreadsheet” activity creates a new Google Sheets document. This activity allows you to specify the title of the new spreadsheet and optionally add initial sheets to it.


*Google sheet nameThe reference name of the google sheet which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Spreadsheet nameSpreadsheet name (it will be created in “My Drive”)
*Credential filePre-authorized user credentials
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Google Sheet name as shown in the example.

newGoogleSheet

.

Copy/Remove Sheet

The “Copy/Remove Sheet” activity provides functionality to either copy or remove a specified sheet within a Google Sheets document. When copying, the activity duplicates the sheet within the same document or to a different document. When removing, the activity deletes the specified sheet from the document. This versatile activity is useful for managing the structure and contents of your Google Sheets documents by allowing both duplication and deletion of sheets.


*Google sheet nameThe reference name of the google sheet which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Source Google sheet nameSource Google Sheet Instance Name. e.g:${myGoogleSheet}
Sheet nameA page or tab name within a spreadsheet. If not included, it defaults to the first page.
*ActionCopy or remove sheet.
New sheet nameThe name of new sheet to create in excel.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Google Sheet name as shown in the example.

GoogleSheet

.

Write dataset to google sheet

The “Write dataset to Google Sheet” activity is used to write changes made in a dataset to the relevant Google Sheet file after the completion of the changes.


*Google sheet nameThe reference name of the google sheet which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset.
Sheet nameA page or tab name within a spreadsheet. If not included, it defaults to the first page.
DestinationSets destination cell on which the operation will write the results.
*ShiftSelect how to copy the dataset to Google Sheet.
Has headerIf there are column headings in the dataset, check the box.
RowRows that will be written to the excel. Use “:” to select range of rows. (Starting from index 0)
ColumnColumns that will be written to the excel. Use “:” to select range of columns. (Starting from index 0)
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Google sheet name as shown in the example.

${newGoogleSheet}

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Destination as shown in the example.

A1 C5

You can use the Shift as shown in the example.

NONE

It copy your data to current place which already has data.

RIGHT

It will copy your data to current place by moving the existing data to the right.

DOWN

It will copy your data to current place by moving the existing data to the down.

Set cell style

Set cell style activity is used for formatting the style of a table cell in Google sheet. This activity changes the appearance of the cell so that the text becomes more readable.


*Google sheet nameThe reference name of the google sheet which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Sheet nameA page or tab name within a spreadsheet. If not included, it defaults to the first page.
RangeThe range of cells to be changed data is given.
Fill colorThe background color of the cell is written as RGB values or the name of the color.
Font colorThe text color is written as RGB values or the name of the color.
BoldThis checkbox provides changing the font thickness.
ItalicThis checkbox provides italicization.
UnderlineThis checkbox provides underlining.
Font sizeThe font size is adjusted. The desired font number is written in this area.
Font nameThe font type is written.
Wrap text?Wrap text. Default is false.
Vertical alignmentVertical alignment of the cells.
Horizontal alignmentHorizontal alignment of the cells.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

${newWord}

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1

A1:B5

You can use the Font color file name as shown in the example.

255,0,0 (Red)

255,255,0 (Yellow)

You can use the Font size as shown in the example.

9

You can use the Font name as shown in the example.

Arial

You can use the Vertical alignment as shown in the examples.

NONE

TOP

CENTER

BOTTOM

JUSTIFY

DISTRIBUTED

You can use the Horizontal alignment as shown in the examples.

NONE

GENERAL

LEFT

CENTER

RIGHT

FILL

JUSTIFY

CENTER_SELECTION

DISTRIBUTED

Close


Close activity is used for closing Google sheet after the operations are performed in the Google sheet


*Google sheet nameThe reference name of the google sheet which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*ActionSpecify the intended action.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Google Sheet name as shown in the example.

newGoogleSheet

You can use the Action as shown in the example.

CLOSE

.

Word

Word activities provide methods of retrieving, refreshing and adding data from word workbooks and worksheets.

Open

Open activity is used for opening an existing word file with doc or docx extension.


*Word nameThe reference name is given to the word file which will open in this field.
Word file nameThe file path is written.
Open PasswordThe password is entered to open or modify the encrypted file.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

robustaWord

You can use the Word file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustaTempRobusta.docx

You can use the Open Password as shown in the example.

1234

Create

Create activity is used for opening an existing Word file with doc or docx extension.


*Word nameThe reference name is given to the word file which will create in this field.
Word file nameThe file path is written.
OverwriteThis checkbox enables overwriting if there is a file or folder with the same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

robustaWord

You can use the Word file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustaTempRobusta.docx

If the “Overwrite” field’s checkbox status is:

True: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, a name change is made. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is changed by overwriting the old file/folder.


False: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, a name change is made. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is not changed. The function gets an error with the message There is folder already in the directory.

Save and close

Save and close activity is used for saving or closing the word file after the operations in the word file.


*Word nameThe reference name of the word file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*ActionThe desired operation is selected. There are three options, Save, Close and Save and Close. 
Word file nameThe file path is written.

Note: If a word file is desired to save as, write the name and path of the word file.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

${newWord}

You can use the Action as shown in the example.

SAVE

CLOSE

SAVE_AND_CLOSE

You can use the Word file name as shown in the example.

C:newWord.docx

If you want to save the word as a different word, the New word file name field must be filled.
If you want to perform both Save and Close operations, activity should be used twice.

Replace

Replace activity is used for replacing a specified text in a Word file with the desired text.


*Word nameThe reference name of the word file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Old patternThe old text that will be replaced is written.
*New patternThe new text that will replace the old text is written.
New line positionIt can provide adding a new line before, after, and both before and after the word that needs to be replaced.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

${newWord}

You can use the Old pattern as shown in the example.

Create

If you want to replace the word create in the word file with the new word, write create in this field.

#name#

$adress$

If you want to replace the $adress$ label in the word file with Maltepe/İstanbul, write $adress$ in this field.

You can use the New pattern as shown in the example.

New

If you want to replace the word create in the word file with the new word, write new in this field.

Maltepe/İstanbul

If you want to replace the $adress$ label in the word file with Maltepe/İstanbul, write Maltepe/İstanbul in this field.

You can use the New line position as shown in the example.

None
BeforeA line is added before the replaced word.
AfterA line is added after the replaced word.
Before_And_AfterA line is added both before and after the replaced word.

Get text

Get text activity is used for importing all existing text in a Word file.


*Word nameThe reference name of the word file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Result variable nameUsed for assigning all the received data in the Word file to the variable.

Note: The variable name to be given must not contain spaces.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

newWord

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

getTextResult

Replace image

Replace image activity is used for replacing a specified image in a Word file with the desired image.


*Word nameThe reference name of the word file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Source of imageFolder path of image.
Height of imageHeight of image in pixels, default value is 450 pixels
Width of imageWidth of image in pixels, default value is 450 pixels
Image textAlt text of the image to be changed in Word document
Image noThe order of the image to be changed in the Word document
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

${newWord}

You can use the Source of image as shown in the example.

C:\Temp\picture.jpeg

Read table to dataset

Read table to dataset activity is used for exporting the specified table in a Word file to the data.


*Word nameThe reference name of the word file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*New dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
*Table indexThe index of the table which will be read to the dataset is written.
Has headerIf the dataset has column headings, true is selected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

${newWord}

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Table name index as shown in the example.

1

Write dataset to word

Write dataset to word activity is used for writing changes made in dataset to the relevant table in Word file after completion of the changes.


*Word nameThe reference name of the word file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Dataset nameThe reference name of the dataset which has already been created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Table indexThe index of the table which will be read to the dataset is written.

Note: The index of the first table will be 0 since tables start from 0.
Include headerIf there are column header in the resulting dataset, true is selected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

${newWord}

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

 ${newDS}

You can use the Table name index as shown in the example.

1

If there is no table in the Word document where the Dataset will be written, the error message “No table found at that index” will be encountered.
Therefore, there must be a table structure in the Word document where the dataset will be transferred.

Append paragraph

Append paragraph activity is used for adding text with a new paragraph into a Word file or adding text to the end or beginning of an existing paragraph.


*Word nameThe reference name of the word file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*TextThe text to be inserted into the paragraph with the position number is written.

Note: If the position number is not given, it is added to the end.
PositionThe position of the table to which will be added is written.

Note: If -1 or null, the table is added to the end of the page, if 0, the table is added to the top of the page, otherwise, it is added after the indexed paragraph.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

${newWord} 

You can use the Text as shown in the example.

To add text:

Hello World

To add a text from variable:

personelDataset

You can use the Position as shown in the example.

1

Append table

Append table activity is used for inserting tables in Word.


*Word nameThe reference name of the word file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
Table positionThe position of the table to which will be added is written.

Note: If -1 or null, the table is added to the end of the page, if 0, the table is added to the top of the page, otherwise, it is added after the indexed paragraph.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

newWord

You can use the Position as shown in the example.

1

Merge cells

Merge cells activity is used for merging cells in word.


*Word nameThe reference name of the word file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Table IndexIndex of the table which will be merged cells is written (starts form 1).
*RangeTable cell range to merge is written (from A to Z are column indexes, from 1 to ∞ are row indexes).
With all dataIf the checkbox is selected, all data in the merged cells are written to the merged field. Otherwise, only the data in the first cell is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

${newWord}

You can use the Table Index as shown in the example.

4 1

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1:C5

If the “With all data” checkbox status is:

True: All data in the merged cells is written to the merged field.


False: Only the data in the first cell is written.

Save as pdf

Save as pdf activity is used for saving Word file as PDF.


*Word nameThe reference name of the word file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Pdf file nameThe file path is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

newWord

You can use the Pdf file name as shown in the example.

C:Robustanew.pdf

Append image

Append image activity can add different sizes of images to word files.


*Word nameThe reference name of the word file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Source of imageFolder path of image.
Height of imageHeight of image in pixels. Default value is 450 pixels
Width of imageWidth of image in pixels. Default value is 450 pixels
Image positionPosition of the image to which to be added.
If -1 or null, image is added to the end of the page.
if zero, image is added to top of the page.
Otherwise added after indexed paragraph.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

newWord

You can use the Source of image as shown in the example.

C:Temppicture.jpeg

You can use the Height of image as shown in the example.

600

You can use the Width of image as shown in the example.

400

Set cell style

Set cell style activity is used for formatting the style of a table cell in Microsoft Word. This activity changes the appearance of the cell so that the text becomes more readable.


*Word nameThe reference name is given to the word file which will open in this field.
*Table indexIndex of the table which will be readed to dataset / written to file or which will be merged (starts from 1)
RangeThe range of cells to be changed data is given.
Fill colorThe background color of the cell is written as RGB values or the name of the color.
Font colorThe text color is written as RGB values or the name of the color.
BoldThis checkbox provides changing the font thickness.
ItalicThis checkbox provides italicization.
UnderlineThis checkbox provides underlining.
Font sizeThe font size is adjusted. The desired font number is written in this area.
Font nameThe font type is written.
Has border?Whether borders (Frame) will be present or not is selected.
Border styleThe border style that will be applied is selected.
Border position?The position of the border that will be applied is selected.
Border colorThe border color of the cells is is written as RGB values or the name of the color.
Vertical alignmentVertical alignment of the cells.
Horizontal alignmentHorizontal alignment of the cells.
Is hyperlink?This checkbox provides converting text to hyperlink.
UrlThis checkbox provides url value to be converted to hyperlink.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Word name as shown in the example.

${newWord}

You can use the Table index as shown in the example.

3

You can use the Range as shown in the example.

A1

A1:B5

You can use the Font color file name as shown in the example.

255,0,0 (Red)

255,255,0 (Yellow)

You can use the Font size as shown in the example.

9

You can use the Font name as shown in the example.

Arial

You can use the Border style as shown in the examples.

NONE

THIN

MEDIUM

DASHED

DOTTED

THICK

DOUBLE

You can use the Border position as shown in the examples.

ALL

NONE

TOP

BOTTOM

LEFT

RIGHT

You can use the Border color as shown in the examples.

yellow

255,56,180

You can use the Vertical alignment as shown in the examples.

NONE

TOP

CENTER

BOTTOM

JUSTIFY

DISTRIBUTED

You can use the Horizontal alignment as shown in the examples.

NONE

GENERAL

LEFT

CENTER

RIGHT

FILL

JUSTIFY

CENTER_SELECTION

DISTRIBUTED

Text File

Text File activities refer to the automation of tasks such as creating, opening, retrieving and writing data to a file.

Open

Open activity is used for opening the existing text file.


*Text nameThe reference name is given to the text file file which will open in this field.
*Text file nameThe file path is written.
*Has headerIt is indicated whether the first line of the text document to be opened is a title or not.
DelimeterIf the type is selected CSV, the separator character in the text document that will be opened is written to split rows into columns.
*TypeThe type of text document that will be opened from the dropdown is chosen.
EncodingThe character encoding that can be used is chosen from the dropdown.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Text name as shown in the example.

newText

You can use the Text file name as shown in the example.

C:tempnotes.txt

You can use the Delimeter as shown in the example.

name; surname; age; “;”

You can use the Type as shown in the examples.

CSV_Default

CSV_Excel

CSV_InformixUnload

CSV_MySQL

CSV_Oracle

CSV_PostgreSQLCsv

CSV_PostgreSQLText

CSV_RFC4180

CSV_TDF

Text

You can use the Encoding as shown in the examples.

UTF-8

UTF-16

ISO-8859-1

ISO-8859-9

Cp1252

Cp1254

US-ASCII

Create

Create activity is used for creating a new text file.


*Text nameThe reference name is given to the text file which will create in this field.
*Text file nameThe file path is written.
*TypeThe type of text document to be opened from the dropdown is chosen.
*Has headerIt is indicated whether the first line of the text document to be opened is a title or not.
DelimeterThe separator character in the text document to be opened is written.
EncodingThe character encoding that can be used is chosen from the dropdown.
OverwriteThis checkbox enables overwriting if there is a file or folder with the same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Text name as shown in the example.

newText

You can use the Text file name as shown in the example.

C:tempnotes.txt

You can use the Type as shown in the examples.

CSV_Default

CSV_Excel

CSV_InformixUnload

CSV_MySQL

CSV_Oracle

CSV_PostgreSQLCsv

CSV_PostgreSQLText

CSV_RFC4180

CSV_TDF

Text

You can use the Delimeter as shown in the example.

name; surname; age; “;”

You can use the Encoding as shown in the examples.

UTF-8

UTF-16

ISO-8859-1

ISO-8859-9

Cp1252

Cp1254

US-ASCII

ANSI

If the “Overwrite” field’s checkbox status is:

True: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, a name change is made. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is changed by overwriting the old file/folder.


False: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, a name change is made. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is not changed. The function gets an error with the message There is folder already in the directory.

The Create file activity under File Operations can also be used to create files with .txt and .csv extensions.

Save and close

Save and close activity is used for saving or closing the text file after the operations in the text file.


*Text nameThe reference name of the text file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
ActionThe desired operation is selected. There are three options, Save, Close and Save and Close. 
*File nameThe file path is written.

Note: If a word file is desired to save as, write the name and path of the word file.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Text name as shown in the example.

${newText}

You can use the Action as shown in the example.

SAVE

CLOSE

SAVE_AND_CLOSE

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

C:tempnotes.txt

Export text

Export text activity is used for creating columns in the dataset by separating the data in the text file according to the specified range.


*Text nameThe reference name of the text file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
HeadersHeader names for the dataset is written.
*Value rangesValue start and end indexes for each column of the dataset are written.
TrimIt provides trimming whitespace characters from the beginning and end of the values.
*New dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Text name as shown in the example.

newText

You can use the Headers as shown in the example.

adı,soyadı

You can use the Value ranges as shown in the example.

0-12,13-25

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the examples.

newDS

Read textfile to dataset

Read text file to dataset activity is used for converting the file to be processed into a dataset.


*Text nameThe reference name of the text file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*New dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Text name as shown in the example.

newText

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

After the data in the file is read, the name of the data set in which the data is written manually. The name written is the name that will be selected in the “Dataset name” field while using the data set in the next functions.

Write dataset to textfile

Write dataset to textfile activity is used for writing the changes to the relevant file after the operations related to the dataset are completed.


*Text nameThe reference name of the text file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Dataset nameThe reference name of the dataset which has already been created is chosen in the dropdown.
AppendIf the append checkbox is checked, data will be appended to the end of the file.

If it is not checked and the text file is empty, the data is written to the text file. If the text file includes the data, the old data is deleted to add the new data.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Text name as shown in the example.

newText

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

Write to textfile

Write to textfile activity is used for writing text to textfile.


*Text file nameThe file path is written.
*TextThe text to be added is written.
AppendIf the append checkbox is checked, data will be appended to the end of the file.

If it is not checked and the text file is empty, the data is written to the text file. If the text file includes the data, the old data is deleted to add the new data.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Text file name as shown in the example.

C:TempmyFile.txt

You can use the Text as shown in the example.

Hello

Read textfile to variable

Read textfile to dataset activity is used for assigning file to be processed to a variable.


*Text nameThe reference name of the text file which has already been opened or created is chosen in the dropdown.
*Result variable nameA variable name that will be created is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Text name as shown in the example.

newText

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

newVariable

File Operations

File activities refer to the automation of the tasks you perform with the files and folders on your computer, such as creating, copying or renaming files and folders.

Create file

Create file activity is used for creating a new file.


*File nameThe file path is written.
OverwriteThis checkbox enables overwriting if there is a file or folder with the same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the file name as shown in the example.

C:Test.txt

C:Deneme.csv

If the “Overwrite” checkbox status is:

True: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, a name change is made. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is changed by overwriting the old file/folder.


False: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, a name change is made. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is not changed. The function gets an error with the message There is folder already in the directory.

The Create text file activity under Text file can also be used to create .txt and .csv files.

Create directory

Create directory is used for creating directory.


*Directory nameThe directory name is written
Create all directoriesIf there is no any intermediate directory in the given file path, it creates it sequentially according to the given path until the last directory.
Example:
C:\Temp\a\b\c
And a not exists, if its true it creates a,b and c directories.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

C:TempDenemeNewDirectory

Copy

Copy activity is used for copying file or folder.


*File nameThe file name or the folder name with path.
*Destination pathThe destination directory for the copied files or folders is written.
OverwriteThis checkbox enables overwriting if there is a file or folder with the same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the folder path as shown in the example.

C:TempTest

You can use the file path as shown in the example.

Full name for specific file:

C:TempTest.xlsx

Files that start with the initial letter a in the folder and have an extension .txt are processed in batches:

C:Tempa*.txt

All files in the folder with extension .xlsx are processed in batch:

C:Temp*.xlsx

All files in the folder will be processed in batch:

C:Temp*.*

All files/folders in the folder will be processed collectively:

C:Temp*

You can use the Destination path as shown in the example.

If you want to copy the folder with the same name to the “Test” folder only:

C:Test

If you want to change the name to “Trial” while copying the folder under the “Test” folder:

C:TestTrial

If simultaneous Rename will not be done in the copying process, make sure that the directory has “” at the end while giving the “Destination path”.

You can use the Destination path as shown in the example.

If you want to copy the file to the “Test” folder with the same name:

C:Test

If you want to change the name to “newFile.xlsx” while copying the file under “Test” folder:

C:TestnewFile.xlsx

If the destination path ends with a file separator (With a slash), the file or folder is located in that path:

C:TempmyFolder


Otherwise, if the destination path has the file or folder name at the end, action will be taken with renaming support:

C:TempmyFolderfileWithNewName.txt

If you use unzip, add folder name:

C:TempmyFolderfolderName

If the “Overwrite” checkbox status is:

True: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the copy will be done. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the old file/folder is overwritten and copied.


False: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the copy will be done. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, it will not be copied. The function gets an error with the message that there is a file/folder already in the directory.

Delete

Delete activity is used for deleting file or folder. File or folder that Delete activity delete cannot be recovered and cannot be found in the Recycle Bin.


*File nameThe file name or the folder name with path.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the folder path as shown in the example.

C:TempTest

All files/folders in the folder will be processed collectively:

C:Temp*

You can use the file path as shown in the example.

Full name for specific file:

C:TempTest.xlsx

Files that start with the initial letter a in the folder and have an extension .txt are processed in batches:

C:Tempa*.txt

All files in the folder with extension .xlsx are processed in batch:

C:Temp*.xlsx

All files in the folder will be processed in batch:

C:Temp*.*

All files/folders in the folder will be processed collectively:

C:Temp*

Move

Move activity is used for moving files and folders to the desired directory.


*File nameThe file name or the folder name with path.
*Destination pathThe destination directory for the copied files or folders is written.
OverwriteThis checkbox enables overwriting if there is a file or folder with the same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the folder path as shown in the example.

C:TempTest

You can use the file path as shown in the example.

Full name for specific file:

C:TempTest.xlsx

Files that start with the initial letter a in the folder and have an extension .txt are processed in batches:

C:Tempa*.txt

All files in the folder with extension .xlsx are processed in batch:

C:Temp*.xlsx

All files in the folder will be processed in batch:

C:Temp*.*

All files/folders in the folder will be processed collectively:

C:Temp*

You can use the Destination path as shown in the example.

If you want to copy the folder with the same name to the “Test” folder only:

C:Test

If you want to change the name to “Trial” while copying the folder under the “Test” folder.

C:TestTrial

You can use the Destination path as shown in the example.

If you want to copy the file to the “Test” folder with the same name:

C:Test

If you want to change the name to “newFile.xlsx” while copying the file under “Test” folder:

C:TestnewFile.xlsx

If the destination path ends with a file separator (With a slash), the file or folder is located in that path:

C:TempmyFolder


Otherwise, if the destination path has the file or folder name at the end, action will be taken with renaming support:

C:TempmyFolderfileWithNewName.txt


If you use unzip, add folder name:

C:TempmyFolderfolderName

If the “Overwrite” checkbox status is:

True: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the move is performed. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the old file/folder is overwritten and moved.


False: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the move is performed. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the move will not be performed. The function gets an error with the message that there is file/folder already in the directory.

Rename

Rename activity is used for changing file or folder name.


*File nameThe file name or the folder name with path.
*New file nameThe new file name without path is written.
OverwriteThis checkbox enables overwriting if there is a file or folder with the same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the file path as shown in the example.

Full name for specific file C:TempTest.xlsx  

You can use the folder path as shown in the example.

C:TempTest

You can use the New file name for file as shown in the example.

newFile.xlsx

You can use the New file name for folder as shown in the example.

NewFile

The extension of the file can also be changed. The file C:test.txt can be done as C:test.csv Changing the name can be done simultaneously while changing the extension.

If the “Overwrite” checkbox status is:

True: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, a name change is made. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is changed by overwriting the old file/folder.


False: If there is no file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, a name change is made. If there is a file/folder with the same name in the relevant directory, the name is not changed. The function gets an error with the message There is folder already in the directory.

Zip

Zip activity is used to converting file to compressed format.


*File nameThe file name or the folder name with path.
*Zip File NameThe zip file name or folder name with path.
OverwriteThis checkbox enables overwriting if there is a file or folder with the same name.
PasswordIf there is a password for compressed file, its password must be entered here.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the file path as shown in the example.

Full name for specific file:

C:TempTest.xlsx

 

Files that start with the initial letter a in the folder and have an extension .txt are processed in batches:

C:Tempa*.txt

All files in the folder with extension .xlsx are processed in batch:

C:Temp*.xlsx

All files in the folder will be processed in batch:

C:Temp*.*

All files/folders in the folder will be processed collectively:

C:Temp*

You can use the Zip file name as shown in the example. 

C:Tempdeneme.zip

Accepts all the following characters for encryption.

türkçeğüışçöÇÖİŞĞÜé!’^+#$%&{()=}-_;`~¨´.₺€@+-[]

The name of the compressed file (The name of the file can be changed) and the format as .zip should be written to give the desired full directory.

If the “Overwrite” checkbox status is:

True: If there is no file with the same name in the relevant directory, compression is performed. If there is a file with the same name in the relevant directory, the old file is overwritten and compressed.


False: If there is no file with the same name in the relevant directory, compression is performed. If there is a file with the same name in the relevant directory, decompression is not performed. The function gets an error with the message File already exists in directory.

Unzip

Unzip activity is used for unziping file in compressed format.


*File nameThe zip file name or the folder name with path.
*Destination pathSpecifies the destination directory of the zip file to be opened.
OverwriteThis checkbox enables overwriting if there is a file or folder with the same name.
PasswordIf there is a password for compressed file, its password must be entered here.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

C:TempTest.zip

You can use the Destination path as shown in the example. 

C:TempTest

C:TempTest2

You can use the Password as shown in the example. 

password

When the compressed file is being converted to a wide format, a new name cannot be given, it comes to the expanded format with that name, whatever the original name of the file is.

If destination path end with a file separator (with a slash) then the file or folder will be located in that path. Otherwise, if destination path has the file or folder name at the end, action will be taken with renaming support.

If the “Overwrite” checkbox status is:

True: If there is no file with the same name in the relevant directory, it is opened. If there is a file with the same name in the relevant directory, the old file is overwritten and opened.


False: If there is no file with the same name in the relevant directory, it is opened. If there is a file with the same name in the relevant directory, it will not be opened. The function gets an error with the message File already exists in directory.

List files

List files activity is used for listing file/folder names in folder.


*Directory nameThe file name or the folder name with path.
*Dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Directory name as shown in the example.

C:TempTest

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

Dataset transferred file and folder names form 5 columns.
Folder/file full directory in column A:

C:Tempdeneme or C:Temptest.xlsx

Folder/file name in column B:

test or text.xlsx


If the folder name is taken in the C column, it is written as “Directory”, if the file name is taken, it is written as “File”.


The resulting dataset appears as follows when excelling Excel. Without excel, the rows of the list in the data set can be taken in the loop.

Get file attributes

Get file attributes are used for assigning a file’s properties such as size, creation date, etc. to a variable.


*File nameThe file name or the folder name with path.
Attribute nameReturns the type of information to be retrieved from the file.
*Result variable nameA variable name that will be created is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

C:Test.txt

You can use the Attribute name as shown in the example.

Date of creation:

CREATION_TIME

Last login date:

LAST_ACCESS_TIME

Last modified time

LAST_MODIFIED_TIME

Size:

SIZE

Whether it is a confidential document:

HIDDEN

Whether the change is on:

READONLY

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

denemeSonuc

Find in textfiles

Find in textfiles is used for searching in all .txt, csv, doc, and docx files or in one file with .txt, csv, doc, and docx extensions. If the files include searched text, the file names are written to the dataset.


*Directory nameThe file name or directory name to be searched is written.
*File typeThe file type to search in is chosen in the dropdown.
*SearchThe text to search is written.
*Dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Directory name as shown in the example

C:Robusta

You can use the File type as shown in the example.

txt

You can use the Search as shown in the example.

Robusta

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

searchResult

File exists

File exists activity is used for giving the information that the file exists or does not exist in the given directory. The result is returned as True or False.


*File nameThe file path or directory is written.
*Result variable name:A variable name that will be created is written.
Retry CountThe number of attempts is written, can be any numeric value. Default value is 1.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the folder path as shown in the example.

C:TempTest

You can use the file path as shown in the example.

Full name for specific file:

C:TempTest.xlsx

Files that start with the initial letter a in the folder and have an extension .txt are processed in batches:

C:Tempa*.txt

All files in the folder with extension .xlsx are processed in batch:

C:Temp*.xlsx

All files in the folder will be processed in batch:

C:Temp*.*

All files/folders in the folder will be processed collectively:

C:Temp*

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

existResult

You can use the Retry Count as shown in the examples.

7

Export from tiff

Export from tiff activity exports images in tiff extension files containing multiple images.


*Tiff file nameThe file path is written.
*Output pathThe path to the folder where the output is to be sent is written.
Image typeThe type of image to be used is chosen in the dropdown.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Tiff file path as shown in the example.

C:TempmyFile.tiff

You can use the Output path as shown in the example.

C:Temp
PNG

JPG

JPEG

TIFF

BMP

GIF

Pdf

Pdf activities include designed to extract data from pdf files and store them in string variables.

Open

Open activity is used to open an existing pdf file.


*Pdf nameThe reference name is given to the PDF file which will open in this field.
*Pdf file nameThe file path is written.
PasswordIf there is a password in the PDF file, the password is written. Otherwise, no need to be used.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Pdf name as shown in the example.

robustaPdf

You can use the Pdf file name as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.pdf

Export as image

Export as images activity is used for exporting PDF file to files with .png, .jpeg, .tiff, .bmp, .gif extensions.


*Pdf nameThe reference name is given to the PDF file which will open in this field.
Start PageThe starting page number of PDF file is written.
End PageThe last page number of PDF file is written.
*Output PathThe directory of the picture that will be created is written.

Note: Creates an image file with the same name and specified page number as the PDF.
*DPIThe resolution of the picture is written. The default value of the picture is 144 dpi.
*Image TypeThe format of the picture to be transferred is chosen in the dropdown. The default format of the picture is PNG.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the pdf reference name as shown in the example.

${RobustaPdf}

You can use the start page as shown in the example.

1

You can use the End page as shown in the example.

3

You can use the Output path as shown in the examples.

C:Robusta

The files are named as follows.

robusta_page_1.png

robusta_page_2.png

robusta_page_3.png

You can use the DPI path as shown in the example.

300

You can use the Image type as shown in the examples.

png

jpeg

jpg

tiff

bmp

gif

Export images

Export images activity enables the images contained in PDF file to be exported to a specified directory in .png format.


*Pdf nameThe reference name is given to the PDF file which will open in this field.
Start PageThe starting page number of the PDF file is written.
End PageThe last page number of the PDF file is written.
*Output PathThe directory of the picture that will be created is written.

Note: Creates an image file with the same name and specified page number as the PDF.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the pdf reference name as shown in the example.

${RobustaPdf}

You can use the start page as shown in the example.

1

You can use the End page as shown in the example.

3

You can use the Output path as shown in the examples.

C:Robusta

The files are named as follows.

robusta_page_1.png

robusta_page_2.png

Convert tables to HTML

Convert tables to HTML activity allows PDF tables to be converted to HTML format.


*Pdf nameThe reference name is given to the PDF file which will open in this field.
*Table TypeThe table structure to be converted is chosen in the dropdown.
Start PageThe starting page number of the PDF file is written.
End PageThe last page number of the PDF file is written.
Maximum font sizeMaximum font size is written.
Ignore line countThe number of lines that will not be written to the html output, from the beginning of the start page is written.
*Output PathThe directory of the HTML file that will be created is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the pdf reference name as shown in the example.

${RobustaPdf}

You can use the Table type as shown in the example.

BASIC : Used for simple tables.

COMPLEX : Used for different and complex table structures.

STRIPLESS : Used for pdfs with table structure but no table lines.

Note : Strikethrough lines may occur when the “BASIC” feature is selected. If this situation is not desired, the table type should be changed to “COMPLEX”.

You can use the start page as shown in the example.

1

You can use the End page as shown in the example.

1

You can use the Output path as shown in the examples.

C:Robusta

robusta.html

Read text

Read text activity allows all records in the PDF file to be received as text.


*Pdf nameThe reference name is given to the PDF file which will open in this field.
Start pageThe starting page number of PDF file is written.
End pageThe last page number of PDF file is written.
*Result variable nameA variable name that will be created is written.
X-coordinateThe pixel value of the X-coordinate of the area to be read on the pdf is written.

Note: If it is desired to limit the area in the PDF file, this field must be used with a Y-coordinate, Height, and Width.
Y-coordinateThe pixel value of the Y-coordinate of the area to be read on the pdf is written.

Note: If it is desired to limit the area in the PDF file, this field must be used with a X-coordinate, Height, and Width.
HeightThe pixel value of the Height of the area to be read on the pdf is written.

Note: If it is desired to limit the area in the PDF file, this field must be used with a X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, and Width.
WidthThe pixel value of the Width of the area to be read on the pdf is written.

Note: If it is desired to limit the area in the PDF file, this field must be used with a X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, and Height.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Pdf name as shown in the example.

${RobustaPdf}

You can use the start page as shown in the example.

1

You can use the End page as shown in the example.

3

You can use the Result text name as shown in the example.

readRobustaPdf

120
250
50
100

Merge pdf

Merge pdf activity allows merging of pdf files.


*Pdf file nameThe file path of the first PDF file is written.
PasswordIt is used if there is a password in the first PDF file to be processed. Otherwise, it is not mandatory to use.
*File name 2The file path of the second PDF file is written.
Password 2It is used if there is a password in the second PDF file to be processed. Otherwise, it is not mandatory to use.
*New file nameThe new file name is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Pdf file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustarobustaStarter.pdf

You can use the Password as shown in the example.

123456!

You can use the File name 2 as shown in the example.

C:RobustarobustaConfulence.pdf

You can use the Password 2 as shown in the example.

987654!

You can use the New file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustarobustaMerge.pdf

Extract attachment

Extract attachment activity allows the attachments in a PDF file to be exported to a specified directory.


*Pdf File nameThe resource file name is written.
PasswordIt is used if there is a password in the PDF file to be processed. Otherwise, it is not mandatory to use.
*Attach file pathThe output attachment directory is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Pdf file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustarobustaStarter.pdf

You can use the Password as shown in the example.

123456!

You can use the Attach file path as shown in the example.

C:Robusta

Split pdf

Split pdf activity allows splitting of pdf files.


*Pdf file nameThe file path of the first PDF file is written.
PasswordIt is used if there is a password in the first PDF file to be processed. Otherwise, it is not mandatory to use.
Start pageStart page.
Type: Integer
End pageEnd page.
Type: Integer
*New file nameThe new file name is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Pdf file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustarobustaStarter.pdf

You can use the Password as shown in the example.

123456!

You can use the New file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustarobustaMerge.pdf

Dataset

Dataset activities provide methods for creating, extracting, and adding data to a dataset.

Create

Create activity allows creating the new dataset.


*New dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

It is not possible to write any data when row and column are not added to a newly created dataset.
This is done with the “Add row” and “Add Column” activities.

Get action

Get action activity allows to retrieve data from a cell in the dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*RowRow index.
*ColumnsColumn name or column index.
*Result variable nameVariable name of the return value.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Row name as shown in the example.

Row value starts at 0.

0

You can use the Column name as shown in the examples.

Column value starts at 0.

0

Name

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

getNameResult

Set action

Set action activity allows writing data to a cell in the dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*ColumnColumn name or column index.
RowRow index.
*ValueIt refers to the value required to be written to the data set to be processed.
*TypeType of the value to set.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Column name as shown in the examples.

Column value starts at 0.

0

Name

0:3

You can use the Row name as shown in the examples.

Row value starts at 0.

0

You can use the Value name as shown in the examples.

Robusta

${Name}

You can use the Type as shown in the example.

STRING

INTEGER

DOUBLE

DATE

BOOLEAN

Get size

Get size activity gives the result of the number of rows in a dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
Size typeThe operation to be counted in the dataset is selected.
*Result variable nameVariable name of the return value.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Size type as shown in the examples.

Row

Column

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

sizeResult

Set header

Set header activity allows the column to be changed/added in the dataset to be named as a column header.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*ColumnColumn name or column index.
*New headerNew header for the selected column.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Column as shown in the examples.

0

Name

You can use the New header as shown in the example.

Comany Name

Add column

Add column activity is used to add columns within a dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*Column nameName of the column to be added. If null, adds row to the end.
Column indexThe order of the column to be added.
Result variable nameVariable name of the return value.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Column name as shown in the examples.

0

Name

Name,Surname

You can use the Column index as shown in the examples.

The column number starts from 0. If left blank, a column is added to the last column in the dataset.

If it is desired to add a column to the last column in the dataset, the new column index field should be left blank.

If a column is wanted to be added to an empty dataset (Dataset), 0 should be given as an index. Otherwise, a new column cannot be created.

If multiple columns are added (comma-separated entry in the ‘Column name’ field), the value corresponding to the number of columns added should be given in this field. Example: If 3 columns are added, “4:6” should be given.

10:12

0

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

resultVariable

Remove column

Remove column activity is used to delete a column from a dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*ColumnColumn name or column index.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Column as shown in the examples.

0

Name

A:C

0:4

Add row

Add row activity is used to add columns within a dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
RowColumn name or column index.
Result variable nameVariable name of the return name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Row as shown in the example.

The row number starts from 0. If left blank, a row is added to the last column in the dataset.

0

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

resultVariable

Remove row

Remove row activity is used to delete a row from a dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*RowRow index.
Remove by filterIf the rows will be removed according to a filter expression, then this parameter should be set true.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Row as shown in the example.

0

Get row as json

Get row as json activity allows to create a variable in JSON format of a row in the dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*RowRow index.
Result variable nameVariable name of the return value.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Row as shown in the example.

0

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

getJSON

Get rows as json

Get rows as json activity allows creating a variable in JSON format of a rows in the dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*RowsRows index.
Result variable nameVariable name of the return value.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Row as shown in the example.

0:3

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

getJSON

Sort

Sort activity is used to sort a dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*SortSort expression.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Sort as shown in the examples.

“columnName” asc

“columnName” desc

Filter

Filter activity is used to filter within a dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*FilterFilter expression.
*New dataset nameIt is named by creating a new dataset containing filtered data.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Filter as shown in the examples.

$”ad”=”ilhan” and $”Numara”=5
$”ad” begins with “il” or $”Numara”=7
$”ad” contains “han”
$”SIRKET”=”Robusta”
$”${columnName}”=”Robusta”
$”mail”=”${mailAdresi}”

$”A”=”Robusta”

“Important Note: Applicable when ‘has header’ is selected as false in the ‘Read Excel to Dataset’ activity.”



=

!=

<

<=

begins with, ends with, contains, does not contain, and, or

(

)

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

newFilteredDS

Remove blanks

Remove blanks activity creates a new dataset (Dataset) by removing the empty rows in the dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*New dataset nameReference name of the dataset which will be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

removeBlanksDS

Remove duplicates

Remove duplicates activity transforms the repetitive data in a dataset into singular.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset.
*New dataset nameReference name of the dataset which will be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

removeDupDS

Merge

Merge activity allows combining two datasets. It allows writing the second data set after the first data set. It allows merging of two data sets without having to have the same pattern. In other words, while there are 3 columns in the first data set, while the second data set has 4 columns, it combines these two data sets.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be used for operations.
*Dataset name 2Reference name of the 2nd dataset selected for processing.
Merge typeCombines two datasets in two different ways: Vertical and Horizontal.
*New dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Dataset name 2 as shown in the example.

newDS2

You can use the Merge type as shown in the examples.

Vertical

Horizontal

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

mergeDS

Join

Join activity allows two datasets to be joined by referencing the selected columns.


*Dataset nameName of dataset which will be used for operations.
*Dataset name 2Name of the 2nd dataset selected for processing.
*Source referenceSource column name reference in which the dataset will be joined.
*Destination referenceDestination column name reference in which the dataset will be joined.
*New dataset nameName of dataset which will be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

dataset1

You can use the Dataset name 2 as shown in the example.

dataset2

You can use the Source reference as shown in the examples.

Id

You can use the Destination reference as shown in the examples.

Plaka

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

Depending on the size of the datasets and the order in which they are processed, different results will be obtained.

Input
Source Dataset
Source reference : Id
Input
Destination Dataset
Destination reference : Plaka
Output
New Dataset

Input
Source Dataset
Source reference : Plaka
Input
Destination Dataset
Destination reference : Id
Output
New Dataset

Minus

Minus activity gives the difference between the two datasets. It gives the result of data that is in the first dataset and not in the second dataset. Two data sets must be in the same pattern in order to get the correct result. In other words, both datasets must have the same columns. It works by providing control in the second data set for all data included in the first dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be used for operations.
*Dataset name 2Reference name of the 2nd dataset selected for processing.
*New dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

${newDS}

You can use the Dataset name 2 as shown in the example.

newDS2

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

minusDS

Union

Union activity allows finding the combination set of two datasets. Unlike the Merge activity, the Union activity takes the data that exists in both combination sets into a combination set as a single data. The two datasets must have the same pattern.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be used for operations.
*Dataset name 2Reference name of the 2nd dataset selected for processing.
*New dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Dataset name 2 as shown in the example.

newDS2

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

unionDS

Intersection

Intersection activity allows to find the intersection set of two datasets. The two datasets must be in the same pattern.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be used for operations.
*Dataset name 2Reference name of the 2nd dataset selected for processing.
*New dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

newDS

You can use the Dataset name 2 as shown in the example.

newDS2

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

intersectionDS

Save as

Save as activity allows to save a dataset in different formats such as CSV, Excel, Json, Xml, Html, Pdf.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be used for operations.
*Text file nameFile name with path.
*TypeThe dataset; Csv, excel, json, xml, html, pdf formats are selected to be saved.
Include headerFirst row of selected range is a header.
DelimeterSpecifies with which separator cellular data will be combined when saving in CSV format.
Quote charIt determines the character in which string values ​​will be written when saving in CSV format.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

${datasetname}

You can use the Text file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustaOrnek.csv

You can use the Type as shown in the examples.

CSV

EXCEL

JSON

XML

HTML

PDF

You can use the Delimeter as shown in the example.

It only needs to be filled when the CSV type is selected.

,

;

You can use the Quote char as shown in the examples.

It only needs to be filled when the CSV type is selected.

Close

Close activity allows closing a dataset.


*Dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be used for operations.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

${newDS}

Mail

Mail activities are designed to facilitate the automation of mail-related tasks covering various protocols such as IMAP, POP3 or SMTP.

You can reach a how-to guide on Mail component by clicking here.

Exchange connection

Exchange connection activity is the area where the necessary information to establish a connection to the Exchange server is received. In order to be able to receive or send an e-mail, the server connection must be established first. Other mail methods are included in the next step.


Configuration nameIt is the name of the opened connection. This name will be chosen in other mail components.
*Connection nameThe reference name is given to the mail connection which will open in this field.
HostThe server information of the e-mail address is entered.
UsernameUsername information of the e-mail address is entered.
PasswordPassword information of the e-mail address is entered.
DomainThe domain name information of the e-mail address is entered.
TypeThe type of Exchange server is chosen in the dropdown.
Test connectionThe correctness of the connection can be checked with a button.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

mailConnection

You can use the Host as shown in the example.

https://outlook.com/Exchange.asmx

You can use the Username as shown in the example.

john.doe@outlook.com

You can use the Password as shown in the example.

johndoe123

You can use the Domain as shown in the example.

outlook.com

You can use the Type as shown in the example.

Exchange2007_SP1

Exchange2010

Exchange2010_SP1

Exchange2010_SP2

Imap/Smtp connection

Imap/Smtp connection activity is the area where the necessary information to establish a connection to the Imap/Smtp server is obtained. Incoming mails in IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) as a system first come to the server where the user is logged in and then send them to a different e-mail server in the recipient’s mailbox using SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol). Since the user can read mails, ie download them, SMTP is a one-way (Sending) protocol, IMAP is activated and the mails are downloaded.


Configuration nameIt is the name of the opened connection. This name will be chosen in other mail components.
*Connection nameThe reference name is given to the mail connection which will open in this field.
Imap hostImap server information of the mail address is entered.
Imap portImap port information of the mail address is entered.
Imap userImap username information of the e-mail address is entered.
Imap passwordImap password of the e-mail address is entered.
Imap sslWhether there is an Imap Ssl certificate in the mail address is specified with true/false.
Imap tls enabledWhether the Smtp tls certificate is present in the mail address is specified with true/false.
Imap tls requiredTrue/false indicates whether the Imap tls certificate is required in the mail address.
Smtp hostSmtp server information of the e-mail address is entered.
Smtp portSmtp port information of the e-mail address is entered.
Smtp userSmtp username information of the e-mail address is entered.
Smtp passwordThe Smtp password of the e-mail address is entered.
Smtp sslWhether the Smtp Ssl certificate is present in the mail address is specified with true/false.
Smtp tls enabledWhether the Smtp tls certificate is present in the mail address is specified with true/false.
Smtp tls requiredWhether the Smtp tls certificate is required in the mail address is specified with true/false.
Test connectionThe correctness of the connection can be checked with a button
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.
If the “Configuration” field is filled while creating the mail connection, the “IMAP” and “SMTP” fields do not need to be filled.
If the “Configuration” field is not filled while creating the mail connection, at least one of the “IMAP” and “SMTP” fields is expected to be filled.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

mailConnection

You can use the Imap host as shown in the example.

imap.gmail.com

You can use the Imap port as shown in the example.

In order to send mail messages, Microsoft Outlook and Apple Mail etc. Other mail clients require settings specified by the service provider. This field must be entered as 993 for Gmail

993

You can use the Imap user as shown in the example.

john.doe@gmail.com

You can use the Imap password as shown in the example.

In order to receive mail messages, the password of the e-mail address to be linked is entered.

JohnDoe123

You can use the Imap ssl as shown in the example.

In order to receive mail messages, Microsoft Outlook and Apple Mail etc. Other mail clients require settings specified by the service provider. This field must be set to True for Gmail.

You can use the Imap tls enabled as shown in the example.

In order to receive mail messages, Microsoft Outlook and Apple Mail etc. Other mail clients require settings specified by the service provider. For Gmail, this field must be set to False.

You can use the Imap tls required as shown in the example.

In order to receive mail messages, Microsoft Outlook and Apple Mail etc. Other mail clients require settings specified by the service provider. For Gmail, this field must be set to False.

You can use the Smtp host as shown in the example.

smtp.gmail.com

You can use the Smtp port as shown in the example.

In order to send mail messages, Microsoft Outlook and Apple Mail etc. Other mail clients require settings specified by the service provider. For Gmail, this field must be entered 587.

587

You can use the Smtp user as shown in the example.

In order to send mail messages, the e-mail address to be linked is entered.

john.doe@gmail.com

You can use the Smtp password as shown in the example.

In order to send e-mail messages, the password of the e-mail address to be linked is entered.

JohnDoe123

You can use the Smtp ssl as shown in the example.

In order to send mail messages, Microsoft Outlook and Apple Mail etc. Other mail clients require settings specified by the service provider. For Gmail, this field must be set to False.

You can use the Smtp tls enabled as shown in the example.

In order to send mail messages, Microsoft Outlook and Apple Mail etc. Other mail clients require settings specified by the service provider. This field must be set to True for Gmail.

You can use the Smtp tls required as shown in the example.

In order to send mail messages, Microsoft Outlook and Apple Mail etc. Other mail clients require settings specified by the service provider. This field must be set to True for Gmail

Read/Save/Attachment

Read/Save/Attachment activity is used for reading and saving mails in specified folders and for additional files in mails.


*Connection nameThe reference name of the mail connection which has already been established is chosen in the dropdown.
*Dataset nameThe reference name of the already opened dataset is chosen in the dropdown.
Mail noIf the value of the Mail No field is empty or -1, then selected actions will be applied to all emails. Emails are sorted by oldest first.
Mark as read?Whether the emails will be marked as read or not after the transaction is specified as True/False is decided.
Mark as unread?Whether the emails will be marked as unread or not after the transaction is specified as True/False is decided.
Mark as deleted?It is specified whether the emails will be deleted after the process.
Save attachments?True/False whether to save mail attachments or not is decided.
Save attachments recursively?Save all attachments which included in .eml and .msg attachments if it is checked.
Save mail?Whether the emails will be saved or not after the transaction is specified as True/False is decided.
Save pathThe directory where the emails or attachments will be saved is written.
Attachment Dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field for mail attachments.
Save message body images?Save inline and external URL images of message. Available only for IMAP/SMTP
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

mailConnection

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

searchDS

You can use the Mail no as shown in the example.

-1

2

You can use the Save path as shown in the example.

C:Temp

Send

Send activity is used for sending mail via Send mail server.


*Connection nameThe reference name of the mail connection which has already been established is chosen in the dropdown.
FromAn email address that is for the sender is written.
ToAn email address that is for the receiver is written. To add multiple addresses, use “,” or “;” to separate them. It may differ depending on the mail service provider.
SubjectIf it is desired to be added subject, the subject title is written.
MessageThe content of the message is written.
AttachmentThe directory of the file/files to be attached to the mail is written.

Note: If more than one file is to be entered, directories should be separated by commas (,)
CcThe e-mail addresses of the people who want to be informed about the content of the mail are entered.
BccThe addresses of the people who want to be informed securely are written.
Is HTML?If the mail is wanted to send in HTML format, this checkbox is checked.
Send delivery receiptA delivery receipt confirms delivery of your email message to the recipient’s mailbox.
Send read receiptRead receipt confirms that your message was opened.
Read Timeout ValueThe time(in Milliseconds) to read is entered depending on the size of the attached file.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

mailConnection

You can use the From as shown in the example.

albert.baker@gmail.com

You can use the To as shown in the example.

john.doe@outlook.com,adam.tru@outlook.com

You can use the Subject path as shown in the example.

About the Financial Statement

You can use the Subject path as shown in the example.

Hello, This mail has been sent for testing purposes.

You can use the Attachment as shown in the example.

C:Tempattachment.xlsx,C:Masraffile.xlsx

You can use the Cc as shown in the example.

brandenenastanford@gmail.com

You can use the Bcc as shown in the example.

lilymagdalendawson@gmail.com

You can use the Read Timeout Value as shown in the example.

300000

To send a mail, only cc and bcc fields can be used.

Reply

Reply activity is used for replying mail via Reply mail server.


*Connection nameThe reference name of the mail connection which has already been established is chosen in the dropdown.
*Dataset nameThe reference name of the already opened dataset is chosen in the dropdown.
Mail noIf the value of the Mail No field is empty or -1, then selected actions will be applied to all emails. Emails are sorted by oldest first.
SubjectIf it is desired to be added title, the subject title is written.
MessageThe content of the message is written.
AttachmentThe directory of the file/files to be attached to the mail is written.

Note: If more than one file is to be entered, directories should be separated by commas (,)
CcThe e-mail addresses of the people who want to be informed about the content of the mail are entered.
Is HTML?If the mail is wanted to send in HTML format, this checkbox is checked.
Reply all?This checkbox activates or deactivates the reply to all options.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

mailConnection

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

searchDS

You can use the Mail no as shown in the example.

0

1

You can use the Subject path as shown in the example.

About the Financial Statement

You can use the Subject path as shown in the example.

Hello, This mail has been sent for testing purposes.

You can use the Attachment as shown in the example.

C:Tempattachment.xlsx,C:Masraffile.xlsx

You can use the Cc as shown in the example.

brandenenastanford@gmail.com

Forward

Forward activity is used for forwarding mail to other users through Forward mail server.


*Connection nameThe reference name of the mail connection which has already been established is chosen in the dropdown.
*Dataset nameThe reference name of the already opened dataset is chosen in the dropdown.
*Mail noIf the value of the Mail No field is -1, then selected actions will be applied to all emails. Emails are sorted by oldest first.
FromAn email address that is for the sender is written.
*ToAn email address that is for the receiver is written. To add multiple addresses, use “,” or “;” to separate them. It may differ depending on the mail service provider.
SubjectIf it is desired to be added title, the subject title is written.
MessageThe content of the message is written.
AttachmentThe directory of the file/files to be attached to the mail is written.

Note: If more than one file is to be entered, directories should be separated by commas (,)
CcThe e-mail addresses of the people who want to be informed about the content of the mail are entered.
BccThe addresses of the people who want to be informed securely are written.
Is HTML?If the mail is wanted to send in HTML format, this checkbox is checked.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

mailConnection

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

searchDS

You can use the Mail no as shown in the example.

0

1

You can use the From as shown in the example.

albert.baker@gmail.com

You can use the To as shown in the example.

john.doe@outlook.com

You can use the Subject path as shown in the example.

About the Financial Statement

You can use the Message as shown in the example.

If “is HTML” is true, you can edit the message part with html code.

Hello, This mail has been sent for testing purposes.

You can use the Attachment as shown in the example.

C:Tempattachment.xlsx,C:Masraffile.xlsx

You can use the Cc as shown in the example.

brandenenastanford@gmail.com

You can use the Cc as shown in the example.

lilymagdalendawson@gmail.com

Create folder

Create folder activity is used for creating folders via mail server.


*Connection nameThe reference name of the mail connection which has already been established is chosen in the dropdown.
*Folder nameThe desired folder name is written to create.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

mailConnection

You can use the Folder name as shown in the example.

Moved

Move mail

Move mail activity is used for moving mails to folders via mail server.


*Connection nameThe reference name of the mail connection which has already been established is chosen in the dropdown.
*Dataset nameThe reference name of the already opened dataset is chosen in the dropdown
*Folder nameThe folder name in which mails will be moved is written.
Mail noIf the value of the Mail No field is empty or -1, then selected actions will be applied to all emails. Emails are sorted by oldest first.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

mailConnection

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

searchDS

You can use the Folder name as shown in the example.

Moved

You can use the Mail no as shown in the example.

0

Close connection

Close connection activity is used to close mail connection.


*Connection nameThe reference name of the mail connection which has already been established is chosen in the dropdown.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

robustamailconnection

MS Outlook

MS Outlook activities enable to perform Outlook operations.

Send

Send activity opens the logged in Outlook application and sends an e-mail.


ToThe receiver’s email address for to field is written. To add multiple addresses, it is used ‘,’ or ‘;’ to separate them.
CcThe email address for the cc field is written. To add multiple addresses, it is used ‘,’ or ‘;’ to separate them.
BccThe email address for the bcc field is written. To add multiple addresses, it is used ‘,’ or ‘;’ to separate them.
SubjectIf it is desired to be added subject, the subject title is written.
MessageThe content of the message is written.
AttachmentThe directory of the file/files to be attached to the mail is written.

Note: This feature depends on your Outlook settings. Check Outlook Options > Mail > Send messages
IsHtml?If the mail is wanted to send in HTML format, this checkbox is checked.
Send delivery receiptA delivery receipt confirms delivery of your email message to the recipient’s mailbox.
Send read receiptA read receipt confirms that your message was opened.
High ImportanceAllows users to mark an email as high priority when sending it to indicate its importance
Email AddressIf you have multiple email addresses, it enables you to send the email with the specified email address
Behalf of nameDisplayed named to receiver
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the To as shown in the example.

albert.baker@gmail.com

You can use the Cc as shown in the example.

brandenenastanford@gmail.com

You can use the Bcc as shown in the example.

lilymagdalendawson@gmail.com

You can use the Subject as shown in the example.

About the Financial Statement

You can use the Message as shown in the example.

Hello, This mail has been sent for testing purposes.

You can use the Attachment as shown in the example.

C:Tempattachment.xlsx,C:Masraffile.xlsx

Mark

Mark activity allows the mails to be marked as read or unread.


*Entry idThe entry id of the mail item is written. Entry id is in the first column in the Dataset created in the Search activity.
Mark asMark as read or unread is specified.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Entry id as shown in the example.

${entryID}

You can use the Mark as shown in the example.

READ

UNEAD

Download attachments

Download attachment activity allows downloading the files in mail attachment.


*Entry idThe entry id of the mail item is written. Entry id is in the first column in the Dataset created in the Search activity.
*PathThe directory where the attachments will be downloaded is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Entry id as shown in the example.

${entryID}

You can use the Path as shown in the example.

D:robustafiles

Save

Save activity is used for saving mails in specified folders and for additional files in mails.


*Entry idThe entry id of the mail item is written. Entry id is in the first column in the Dataset created in the Search activity.
*PathThe directory where the email will be saved is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Entry id as shown in the example.

123

You can use the Path as shown in the example.

C:Robustafiles

Reply/Reply all/Forward

Reply/Reply all/Forward activity is used for replying to and forwarding mail to one or more than one receiver.


*Entry idThe entry id of the mail item is written. Entry id is in the first column in the Dataset created in the Search activity.
ActionThe action is selected for the email.
ToThe receiver’s email address for to field is written. To add multiple addresses, it is used ‘,’ or ‘;’ to separate them.
CcThe email address for the cc field is written. To add multiple addresses, it is used ‘,’ or ‘;’ to separate them.
BccThe email address for the bcc field is written. To add multiple addresses, it is used ‘,’ or ‘;’ to separate them.
SubjectIf it is desired to be added subject, the subject title is written.
MessageThe content of the message is written.
AttachmentThe directory of the file/files to be attached to the mail is written.

Note: If more than one file is to be entered, directories should be separated by commas (,)
is HTML?If the mail is wanted to send in HTML format, this checkbox is checked.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Entry id as shown in the example.

123

You can use the Action as shown in the examples.

REPLY

REPLY_ALL

FORWARD

You can use the To as shown in the example.

albert.baker@gmail.com

You can use the Cc as shown in the example.

brandenenastanford@gmail.com

You can use the Bcc as shown in the example.

lilymagdalendawson@gmail.com

You can use the Subject as shown in the example.

About the Financial Statement

You can use the Message as shown in the example.

Hello, This mail has been sent for testing purposes.

You can use the Attachment as shown in the example.

C:Tempattachment.xlsx,C:Masraffile.xlsx

Move mail

Move mail activity is used for moving mails to folders via mail server.


*Entry IdThe entry id of the mail item is written. Entry id is in the first column in the Dataset created in the Search activity.
*Folder nameThe name of the folder where the files will be moved is written.
Email AddressSpecify e-mail address to scan (if you have several e-mail addresses on Outlook)
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Entry id as shown in the example.

${entryId}

You can use the Folder name as shown in the example.

Inbox

To move in a subfolder, use “/” to specify path.

Inbox/Robusta/RPA

Read from file

Read from file activity allows to read a “.msg” file.

*File NameMsg file name with the path to read is written.
PathThe file path where the emails will be saved is written. where the mails will be saved.
*New Dataset NameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the File Name as shown in the example.

D:robustafilesmyMail.msg

You can use the Path as shown in the example.

D:robustafiles

You can use the New Dataset Name as shown in the example.

newDs

Database

Database activities allow the user to connect to the database and query, call a function or procedure, and add/delete/update records.

Open connection

Open connection activity is used for establishing a connection to the desired database server.


*Connection
name
A connection name is defined to be used as the database connection variable.
*Database nameThe name of the previously defined database on the DB Definitions page in the RPA-Admin module.
*Database userDatabase user name information is written.
*Database urlJdbc URL entry is written in accordance with the database to be connected.
*Database passwordDatabase user password information is written.
*Driver nameThe driver suitable for the database to be connected is selected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

robustaConnection

You can use the Database user shown in the example.

MYSQL

You can use the Database user shown in the example.

root

You can use the Url for Mysql as shown in the example.

jdbc:mysql://localhost:3306/robusta

You can use the Url for Oracle as shown in the example.

jdbc:oracle:thin:@localhost:8080:robusta

You can use the Url for SQL server as shown in the example.

jdbc:sqlserver://localhost:1433;databaseName=robusta

You can use the Url for Apache Impala as shown in the example.

jdbc:impala://[Host]:[Port]

You can use the Url for PostgreSQL as shown in the example.

Connection db = DriverManager.getConnection(url, username, password)

You can use the Url for IBM S400 server as shown in the example.

JDBC URL:  jdbc:as400://hostname/default-schema

You can use the Url for Sybase server as shown in the example.

jdbc:sybase:Tds:host:port?ServiceName=database

You can use the Url for Bkz. as shown in the examples.

https://docs.oracle.com/cd/E57185_01/ESTUG/apbs02s04s01.html

You can use the Database password shown in the example.

1234

You can use the Url for Mysql as shown in the example.

com.mysql.jdbc.Driver

You can use the Url for Oracle as shown in the example.

oracle.jdbc.driver.OracleDriver

You can use the Url for SQL server as shown in the example.

com.microsoft.sqlserver.jdbc.SQLServerDriver

Close connection


Close connection activity is used for closing an opened connection.


*Connection
name
The defined connection name before is chosen from the dropdown.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

robustaConnection

Execute query

Execute query activity is used for adding, updating and deleting records in the database.


*Connection
name
The defined connection name before is chosen from the dropdown.
Param1The value to be assigned to the first parameter is written.
Param2The value to be assigned to the second parameter is written.
Param3The value to be assigned to the third parameter is written.
Param4The value to be assigned to the fourth parameter is written.
Param5The value to be assigned to the fifth parameter is written.
ParametersIf it is desired to put multiple parameters, parameters are written.
*Query sqlThe value of sql query is written.
*Result dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

robustaConnection

You can use the Param1 as shown in the examples.

2314589

${customerID}

You can use the Param2 as shown in the examples.

Company A

${companyName}

You can use the Param3 as shown in the examples.

area

${area}

You can use the Param4 as shown in the examples.

title

${title}

You can use the Param5 as shown in the examples.

robusta

${company}

You can use the Parameters as shown in the example.

[2314589, Company A]

[${customerID}, ${companyName}]

You can use the Query sql as shown in the example.

SELECT * FROM db_test.customer_infos WHERE CustomerID = ‘:1’ AND CompanyName = ‘:2’ ;

You can use the Query sql as shown in the example.

employeesDataset

Call stored procedure

Call stored procedure activity executes a desired stored procedure in the database and returns the result.

Usage examples can be found at this link.


*Connection
name
The defined connection name before is chosen from the dropdown.
Param1The value to be assigned to the first parameter is written.
Param2The value to be assigned to the second parameter is written.
Param3The value to be assigned to the third parameter is written.
Param4The value to be assigned to the fourth parameter is written.
Param5The value to be assigned to the fifth parameter is written.
ParametersIf it is desired to put multiple parameters, parameters are written.
*Stored procedure nameThe stored procedure name is written. The question marks should be added as many as the number of parameters to be used.
*Result dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

robustaConnection

You can use the Param1 as shown in the example.

[‘1’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘2314589’]

You can use the Param2 as shown in the example.

[‘2’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘${companyName}’]

You can use the Param3 as shown in the example.

[‘3’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘${companyName}’]

You can use the Param4 as shown in the example.

[‘4’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘${companyName}’]

You can use the Param5 as shown in the example.

[‘5’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘${companyName}’]

You can use the Parameters as shown in the example.

[[‘1’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘2314589’], [‘2’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘${companyName}’]]

You can use the Stored procedure name as shown in the example.

CALL robusta.getCustomerInfo(?,?);

You can use the Query sql as shown in the example.

employeesDataset

Execute update

Execute update activity executes a requested query on the database and returns the query result.


*Connection
name
The defined connection name before is chosen from the dropdown.
Param1The value to be assigned to the first parameter is written.
Param2The value to be assigned to the second parameter is written.
Param3The value to be assigned to the third parameter is written.
Param4The value to be assigned to the fourth parameter is written.
Param5The value to be assigned to the fifth parameter is written.
ParametersIf it is desired to put multiple parameters, parameters are written.
*Query sqlThe value of sql query is written.
*Result dataset nameThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

robustaConnection

You can use the Param1 as shown in the example.

[‘1’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘2314589’]

You can use the Param2 as shown in the example.

[‘2’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘${companyName}’]

You can use the Param3 as shown in the example.

[‘3’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘${companyName}’]

You can use the Param4 as shown in the example.

[‘4’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘${companyName}’]

You can use the Param5 as shown in the example.

[‘5’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘${companyName}’]

You can use the Parameters as shown in the example.

[[‘1’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘2314589’], [‘2’, ‘STRING’, ‘in’, ‘${companyName}’]]

You can use the Query sql as shown in the example.

insert into rpa_turkey_tablo2 (Ad,Soyad,Sirket_Adi,Unvan) values(‘:1′,’:2′,’:3′,’:4′);

You can use the Query sql as shown in the example.

employeesDataset

Xml and JSON

Xml and JSON activities allow retrieving each element, attribute, in an .xml file. In addition, it allows the files in JSON format to be read and thrown into the data set.

Execute xpath

Execute xpath activity allows reaching the location of each element or attribution in the .xml file via Xpath and getting desired values.


*File nameThe XML file name is written.
*Xml stringIf any result is received as an XML string (Not a file with XML content) XML content is written. The other fields, prefixes, etc. XML is written to parse the content. Then, it is ensured that operations can be performed as a dataset.

Note: If this field is used, the File name field does not need to be used.
*Xpath expressionThe Xpath of which element/attribute to be referenced is referenced and the information related to element or attribute is selected by using Filter field.
*FilterThe information type (element/attribute) to be accessed within Xpath is entered. In the dropdown menu, two information types (element/attribute) can be selected.
PrefixThis is the area where prefixes are defined when using the elements in the XML file. In case more than one prefix is needed, other prefix fields are filled.
UriTo define the first prefix, the URI of the prefix is provided here.
Prefix2This is the area where prefixes are defined when using the elements in the XML file.
Uri2To define prefix2, the URI of the prefix is provided here.
Prefix3This is the area where prefixes are defined when using the elements in the XML file.
Uri3To define the first prefix3, the URI of the prefix is provided here.
*Output datasetA dataset name is written for the XPath execution result.
DelimiterThe delimiter is used to separate the Xpaths when more than one Xpath is used.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

C:UsersAliceDocumentsinvoice.xml

You can use the Xml string as shown in the example.

<string name=”string_name” text_string </string

You can use the Xpath expressions shown in the example.


<? Xml version = “1.0” encoding = “UTF-8”?>
<Invoice>
<Return_ID>135672</Return_ID>
<Store_ID>23465</Store_ID>
<Store_Name>BELGE</Store_Name>
<Supplier_Name>Third Part Company</Supplier_Name>
<Supplier_Account_No>7330028047</Supplier_Account_No>
<Brand_ID>14235</Brand_ID>
</Invoice>
Let’s consider a file with .xml extension that has XML content in this way. Let’s want to access the Store_ID element in the tree structure in the file. The Xpath Statement to be written for this would be as follows:

//Invoice/Store_ID

You can use the Filter as shown in the example.

ELEMENT

Let’s use the XPath specified in the example above. This Xpath takes us to the Store_ID element in the tree structure. That is, the address of an element to be reached with XPath. Thus, ELEMENT is selected from the combobox.

You can use the Prefix shown in the example.

ds:Reference

Based on the XML file content above, this field is not filled because there is no prefix for the elements in the .xml file. The prefix is specified in an xml file as follows:
<ds:Reference Id=”Reference-Id-28eeffb3-146c-4a8a-9e12-19541d39ee0e” URI=””>. The prefix of the Reference element in this expression is ‘ds’.

You can use the Prefix2 shown in the example.

cac:AdditionalDocumentReference

Based on the XML file content above, this field is not filled because there is no prefix for the elements in the .xml file. The As in the above mentioned ‘Prefix’ example, if there is another prefix like “ds”, a prefix is written in this field again. Xpath information also varies according to usage.
<cac:AdditionalDocumentReference>
<cbc:ID>0.00</cbc:ID>
<cbc:IssueDate>2020-03-18</cbc:IssueDate>
<cbc:DocumentType>ALLOWANCETOTALAMOUNT</cbc:DocumentType>
</cac:AdditionalDocumentReference>
As can be seen in this example, different prefixes (prefixes) can be included in the .xml file.

You can use the Prefix3 shown in the example.

caa:Username

Suppose that the file specified in the prefix2 example also has a field like the following:
<caa:Username>john.smith</cbc:DocumentType>
If you want to reach this field in the XML file, in addition to the cac and cbc prefixes, the caa prefix is also introduced in this field; Prefix3: becomes caa.

You can use the URI as shown in the example.

urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonAggregateComponents-2

The prefix contains Uri information in the .xml file.
xmlns: cac = “urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonAggregateComponents-2”, the area to the left of the equation and in quotes contains the Uri information. When writing the expression Uri, the part between the double quotes is written:
It is shown as urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonAggregateComponents-2.

You can use the URI2 as shown in the example.

urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonAggregateComponents-2

The prefix contains Uri information in the .xml file.
The field specified in the expression xmlns: ext = “urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonExtensionComponents-2”, to the left of the equation, and in quotes contains the Uri information. When writing the expression Uri, the part between the double quotes is written:
It is shown as urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonExtensionComponents-2.

You can use the URI3 as shown in the example.

urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonAggregateComponents-2

or Prefix3 defined above, Uri information similar to Uri and Uri2 is written in the specified format.

You can use the Output dataset as shown in the example.

outputvalue

You can use the Delimiter as shown in the example.

If a single xpath is used, the Delimiter must not be filled.

If using multiple xpaths;

The sign separating the xpaths must be entered in the Delimiter field.

If xpaths are separated by “,”

,

Single Xpath


More than one Xpath

  • Each given xpath is taken as the header and the values ​​are written explicitly line by line.

Get value

Get value activity ensures that the value in each element and / or property (attribute) in the .xml extension file to be processed.


*Input datasetThe name written in the output dataset field in the Execute Xpath activity is selected from the dropdown menu.
*RowThe row from which the element in the dataset will be taken is written.
ColumnThe column from which the element in the dataset will be taken is written.
*Output valueA variable name that will be created is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input dataset as shown in example.

${inputvalue}

You can use the Row as shown in the example.

Four(4)

Let’s assume that we keep the location of an .xml file // Invoice as a reference in Xpath in the Execute Xpath component, select the ELEMENT option from the Filter field in accordance with this location and keep the reference field in the dataset.
<Invoice>
<Return_ID>135672</Return_ID>
<Store_ID>23465</Store_ID>
<Store_Name>BELGE</Store_Name>
<Supplier_Name>Third Part Company</Supplier_Name>
<Supplier_Account_No>7330028047</Supplier_Account_No>
<Brand_ID>14235</Brand_ID>
</Invoice>
// Invoice location typed in the xpath field includes all the elements in the xml expression. The information that the element to be accessed is in the row is written in the “Row” field. Whichever element we want to access, the first element (Return_ID) is taken as zero (0), and the other components are accessed by increasing numbers.
In this example, let’s want to access the “Supplier_Account_No” element; Four (4) should be written in the row field.

You can use the Column as shown in the example.

If the column value is a positive number, a search will be made according to the column number and the value will be returned.

0


If it is not a positive number, a search will be made according to the header information and the value will be returned.

//author

You can use the Output value as shown in the example.

outputValue

Update xml

Update xml activity updates XML expressions.


*File nameThe XML file name is written.
*Xml stringIf any result is received as an XML string (Not a file with XML content) XML content is written. The other fields, prefixes, etc. XML is written to parse the content. Then, it is ensured that operations can be performed as a dataset.

Note: If this field is used, the File name field does not need to be used.
*Xpath expressionThe Xpath of which element/attribute to be referenced is referenced and the information related to element or attribute is selected by using Filter field.
*FilterThe information type (element/attribute) to be accessed within Xpath is entered. In the dropdown menu, two information types (element/attribute) can be selected.
*New valueThe new value of the element/attribute to be updated is written.
PrefixThis is the area where prefixes are defined when using the elements in the XML file.
UriTo define the first prefix, URI of the prefix is provided here.
Prefix2This is the area where prefixes are defined when using the elements in the XML file.
Uri2To define prefix2, URI of the prefix is provided here.
Prefix3This is the area where prefixes are defined when using the elements in the XML file.
Uri3To define first prefix3, URI of the prefix is provided here.
*Result variable nameA variable name that will be created is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

C:UsersAliceDocumentsinvoice.xml

You can use the Xml string as shown in the example.

<string name=”string_name” text_string </string

You can use the Xpath expressions shown in the example.


<? Xml version = “1.0” encoding = “UTF-8”?>
<Invoice>
<Return_ID>135672</Return_ID>
<Store_ID>23465</Store_ID>
<Store_Name>BELGE</Store_Name>
<Supplier_Name>Third Part Company</Supplier_Name>
<Supplier_Account_No>7330028047</Supplier_Account_No>
<Brand_ID>14235</Brand_ID>
</Invoice>
Let’s consider a file with .xml extension that has XML content in this way. Let’s want to access the Store_ID element in the tree structure in the file. The Xpath Statement to be written for this would be as follows:

//Invoice/Store_ID

You can use the Filter as shown in the example.

ELEMENT

Let’s use the XPath specified in the example above. This Xpath takes us to the Store_ID element in the tree structure. That is, the address of an element to be reached with XPath. Thus, ELEMENT is selected from the combobox.

You can use the New value as shown in the example.

<? Xml version = “1.0” encoding = “UTF-8”?>
<Invoice>
<Return_ID>135672</Return_ID>
<Store_ID>23465</Store_ID>
<Store_Name>BELGE</Store_Name>
<Supplier_Name>Third Part Company</Supplier_Name>
<Supplier_Account_No>7330028047</Supplier_Account_No>
<Brand_ID>14235</Brand_ID>
</Invoice>

Let’s change the value the Store_ID element.

9876

You can use the Prefix shown in the example.

ds:Reference

Based on the XML file content above, this field is not filled because there is no prefix for the elements in the .xml file. The prefix is specified in an xml file as follows:
<ds:Reference Id=”Reference-Id-28eeffb3-146c-4a8a-9e12-19541d39ee0e” URI=””>. The prefix of the Reference element in this expression is ‘ds’.

You can use the Prefix2 shown in the example.

cac:AdditionalDocumentReference

Based on the XML file content above, this field is not filled because there is no prefix for the elements in the .xml file. The As in the above mentioned ‘Prefix’ example, if there is another prefix like “ds”, a prefix is written in this field again. Xpath information also varies according to usage.
<cac:AdditionalDocumentReference>
<cbc:ID>0.00</cbc:ID>
<cbc:IssueDate>2020-03-18</cbc:IssueDate>
<cbc:DocumentType>ALLOWANCETOTALAMOUNT</cbc:DocumentType>
</cac:AdditionalDocumentReference>
As can be seen in this example, different prefixes (prefixes) can be included in the .xml file.

You can use the Prefix3 shown in the example.

caa:Username

Suppose that the file specified in the prefix2 example also has a field like the following:
<caa:Username>john.smith</cbc:DocumentType>
If you want to reach this field in the XML file, in addition to the cac and cbc prefixes, the caa prefix is also introduced in this field; Prefix3: becomes caa.

You can use the URI as shown in the example.

urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonAggregateComponents-2

The prefix contains Uri information in the .xml file.
xmlns: cac = “urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonAggregateComponents-2”, the area to the left of the equation and in quotes contains the Uri information. When writing the expression Uri, the part between the double quotes is written:
It is shown as urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonAggregateComponents-2.

You can use the URI2 as shown in the example.

urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonAggregateComponents-2

The prefix contains Uri information in the .xml file.
The field specified in the expression xmlns: ext = “urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonExtensionComponents-2”, to the left of the equation, and in quotes contains the Uri information. When writing the expression Uri, the part between the double quotes is written:
It is shown as urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonExtensionComponents-2.

You can use the URI3 as shown in the example.

urn: oasis: names: specification: ubl: schema: xsd: CommonAggregateComponents-2

or Prefix3 defined above, Uri information similar to Uri and Uri2 is written in the specified format.

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

ResultVariable

Read JSON

Reads a json file or a string in json format into a json type variable.


*File NameThe JSON file name is written.
*JSON stringThe string structure to be read is written.
*Result variable nameA variable name that will be created is written.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the File Name as shown in the example.

C:RobustaXml-JsonreadJsontest.json

You can use the JSON string as shown in the example.

[{ “id”: 1 }] { “id”: 1, “firstname”: “Katerina”, “job”: { “site”: “www.javacodegeeks.com”, “name”: “Java Code Geeks” } }

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

resultJson

Read JSON to Dataset

Allows the data defined in JSON format to be transferred to the dataset.


*JSON stringThe string structure to be read is written.
*Output DatasetThe reference name is given to the dataset which will create in this field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the JSON string as shown in the example.

[{ “id”: 1 }] { “id”: 1, “firstname”: “Katerina”, “job”: { “site”: “www.javacodegeeks.com”, “name”: “Java Code Geeks” } }

You can use the Output Dataset as shown in the example.

readDS

Icu

Icu activities consist of components that give coordinate information of specfic image or text on the screen.

Match image

Match image activity is used for finding coordinates of specified image in screen.


*File nameFile name with path.
*Base64Base64 string of image file.
X-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the image to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the Y-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
Y-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the image to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
WidthIf it is desired to limit the image to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Height fields.
HeightIf it is desired to limit the image to be searched on the screen within a certain area; This field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Width fields.
Retry countThe number of tries until the image is found, could be any numeric value.
Match scoreImages are matched if their similarity percentage is higher than the match score.
Find first on topReturns the coordinates of the upper left one when there are multiple matched images.
*Return x-positionFinal x-position, variable name defined to assign the x-coordinate found.
*Return y-positionFinal y-position, variable name defined to assign the y-coordinate found.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

C:Temptest.jpg

This field must be left blank if the process is done with Base64 field.

You can use the Base64 as shown in the example.

iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAGYAAAAsCAYAAACXHM1oAAAAAXNSR0IArs4c6QAAAARnQU1BAACxjwv8YQUAAAAJcEhZcwAAE

This field must be left blank if the process is done with File name field.

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the example.

700

If you want to limit the specified image in a certain area in screen, this field must be filled along with Y-coordinate, height and width.

You can use the Y-coordinate as shown in the example.

400

If you want to limit the specified image in a certain area in screen, this field must be filled along with X-coordinate, height and width.

You can use the Width as shown in the example.

100

If you want to limit the specified image in a certain area in screen, this field must be filled along with X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, and height.

You can use the Height as shown in the example.

50

If you want to limit the specified image in a certain area in screen, this field must be filled along with X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, and width.

You can use the Retry count as shown in the example.

3

You can use the Match score as shown in the example.

0.80

You can use the Return x-position as shown in the example.

xPositionValue

You can use the Return x-position as shown in the example.

yPositionValue

You can use Return x-position and Return y-position variables in Mouse activity in Keyboard & Mouse Operations.

Image can be converted to Base64 in different sites.

The coordinates of file whose path is specified in File name field are found on screen and returned to xPositionValue and yPositionValue variables. Using these returned variables in Mouse activity, the process of clicking on these coordinates can be done.

Gif is an unsupported extension for Match Image activity.

The values for Height and Width must be an integer.

Match text

Match text activity, regardless of the browser or application, is used for finding the coordinate on the currently open screen, in order to find the text to be specified via the component and perform an action.


*TextThe text that will be searched on the screen.
X-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the text to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the Y-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
Y-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the text to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
WidthIf it is desired to limit the text to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Height fields.
HeightIf it is desired to limit the text to be searched on the screen within a certain area; This field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Width fields.
*LanguageThe language of the text to be scanned.
Retry countThe number of tries until the text is found, could be any numeric value.
*Return x-positionFinal x-position, variable name defined to assign the x-coordinate found.
*Return y-positionFinal y-position, variable name defined to assign the y-coordinate found.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Text as shown in the examples.

Deneme

${deneme}

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the example.

700

You can use the Y-coordinate as shown in the example.

400

You can use the Width as shown in the example.

120

You can use the Height as shown in the example.

35

You can use the Language as shown in the example.

For Turkish:

TUR

For English:

ENG

You can use the Retry count as shown in the example.

5

You can use the Return x-position as shown in the example.

xPositionValue

You can use the Return y-position as shown in the example.

yPositionValue

You can use Return x-position and Return y-position variables in Mouse activity in Keyboard & Mouse Operations.

In the example above, the coordinates of the text specified in the Text field will be scanned and a value will be returned to the xPositionValue and yPositionValue variables (For example: 300,280). When we select LEFT_CLICK from the combobox in the Action field of the Mouse Activity and write these returned variables as $ {xPositionValue} and $ {xPositionValue} into the X Position and Y Position fields, the returned values 300 and 280 will be used in the Mouse activity with the variable. As a result of the operation, left mouse click will be performed on the text specified in the Text field.

The values for height and width must be an integer.

Save screen capture

Save screen capture activity allows taking a screenshot of the entire screen or a specific area on the screen.

*File nameFile path where screenshot will be saved.
X-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the image to be screen capture on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the Y-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
Y-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the image to be screen capture on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
WidthIf it is desired to limit the image to be screen capture on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Height fields.
HeightIf it is desired to limit the image to be screen capture on the screen within a certain area; This field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Width fields.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.png

Supported image file types:

png

jpg

jpeg

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the example.

68

You can use the Y-coordinate as shown in the example.

347

You can use the Width as shown in the example.

120

You can use the Height as shown in the example.

35

The values for height and width must be an integer.

Ocr

Ocr activities allow extracting a string or information from an image item.

Read as text

Read as text activity allows a desired image content to be transferred as text to a variable.


*File nameFile name with path.
X-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the text to be read on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the Y-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
Y-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the text to be read on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
WidthIf it is desired to limit the text to be read on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the Y-coordinate, X-coordinate, and Width fields.
HeightIf it is desired to limit the text to be read on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, and Height fields.
*LanguageThe language library is selected.
*Result text nameThe name of the variable to which the OCR result is to be transferred.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.png

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the example.

68

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Y-coordinate as shown in the example.

347

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Width as shown in the example.

120

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Height as shown in the example.

35

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Language as shown in the example.

TUR

ENG

RUS

OCR-B

You can use the Result text name as shown in the example.

readRobustaOcr

If the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width fields are left blank, all of specified image is transferred to variable specified in the Result text name field. If the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width fields are given a value, the area that these fields specified is transferred to variable specified in the Result text name field.

The values for height and width must be an integer.

Screen ocr scan

Screen ocr scan activity allows a specified area on the screen and/or screen to be transferred to a variable as text.


X-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the screen to be scanned on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the Y-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
Y-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the screen to be scanned on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
WidthIf it is desired to limit the screen to be scanned on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Height fields.
HeightIf it is desired to limit the screen to be scanned on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Width fields.
*LanguageThe language library is selected.
*Result text nameThe name of the variable to which the OCR result is to be transferred.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the example.

68

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Y-coordinate as shown in the example.

347

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Width as shown in the example.

120

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Height as shown in the example.

35

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Language as shown in the example.

TUR

ENG

RUS

OCR-B

You can use the Result text name as shown in the example.

screenOcrScan

If the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width fields is left blank, all of specified image is transferred to variable specified in the Result text name field. If the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width fields are given a value, the area that these fields specified is transfered to variable specified in the Result text name field.

The values for height and width must be an integer.

Read words

Read words activity allows a desired image content to be transferred to a variable as text line by line.

*File nameFile name with path.
X-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the text to be read on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the Y-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
Y-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the text to be read on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
WidthIf it is desired to limit the text to be read on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the Y-coordinate, X-coordinate, and Width fields.
HeightIf it is desired to limit the text to be read on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, and Height fields.
*LanguageThe language library is selected.
*Result text nameThe name of the variable to which the OCR result is to be transferred.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.png

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the example.

68

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Y-coordinate as shown in the example.

347

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Width as shown in the example.

120

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Height as shown in the example.

35

X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width field cannot be used alone. In case of using one, other fields must be filled.

You can use the Language as shown in the example.

TUR

ENG

RUS

OCR-B

You can use the Result text name as shown in the example.

resultText

The variable result will be as follows. The results will be transferred to the variable in json format.

{“result”:[{“lineNumber”:1, words:[{“text”:”Hello”,”x”:10,”y”:10,”width”:200,”height”:20}

{“text”:”World”,”x”:220,”y”:10,”width”:205,”height”:20}]}]}

The related component also gives the confidence score besides the coordinates and the text read.

If the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width fields is left blank, all of specified image is transferred to variable specified in the Result text name field. If the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, height and width fields are given a value, the area that these fields specified is transfered to variable specified in the Result text name field.

Example result for confidence value:

{“result”:[{“words”:[{“confidence”:81,”x”:2,”width”:53,”y”:4,”text”:”Succes”,”height”:17 {“confidence”:78,”x”:59,”width”:97,”y”:4,”text”:”Ratio”,”height”:17}],”lineNumber”:1}]}

The values for height and width must be an integer.

System

System activities allow to run commands, batch files on the command line.

Run cmd

Run cmd activity allows run every command and program executed via Cmd.


*Exe nameThe program name typed on the command line using CMD commands.
*Working directoryCMD is the working directory of the program where the command will be run.
Wait until finishIt is specified whether the process will be suspended until the end of the CMD command. If True is selected, the process waits in the relevant step until the program is terminated, if False is selected, the process goes to the next step without waiting for the program to end.
Run as adminWhen this field is checked, the program will be run as admin.
Note: User Account Control Settings should be at the minimum level (Never notify).
ParametersThe parameters of the program.
Result variable nameResult variable name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Exe name as shown in the example.

QAD.Applications.exe

cmd.exe

You can use the Working directory as shown in the example.

C:Temp

C:ebyn

You can use the Wait until finish as shown in the example.

If True is selected, the process waits in the relevant step until the program is terminated, if False is selected, the process goes to the next step without waiting for the program to end.

You can use the Parameters shown in the example.

MD Trial

C:ebynbdp.bat

User Account Control Settings should be at the minimum level (Never notify).

Call ext. method

It is used to call a specific method of an external application and get its result. Call Ext. method can be run with Java, Python and DLL.


*PathEnter the file path to run.
*File nameThe name of the file is written with its extension.
*Class nameEnter the class name of the method to be executed.
*Method nameEnter the method name to be executed.
Argument typeParameter type is selected from Combobox.
Argument valueThe value of the parameter is selected.
Argument optionIt must be filled when the parameter type date is selected. Contains Date Format information.
*Response variable nameThe variable name to which the incoming response will be saved is entered.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Path as shown in the example.

C:UsersDesktopDesktopfileReader

You can use the Path as shown in the example.

readfile.py

You can use the Class name as shown in the example.

Hello

You can use the Method name as shown in the example.

string

You can use the Arg type as shown in the example.

STRING

You can use the Arg value as shown in the example.

Postman request

You can use the Arg option as shown in the example.

12-02-1997

You can use the Response variable name as shown in the example.

degiskenismi

Call vb script

It shows the operations to be performed automatically with the help of “Vb script” in a way to be integrated with a workflow application.


*ScriptThe vb script code is written in this field.
Result variable nameResult variable name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Script as shown in the example (Hidden sheet in an excel file).

Set objXLApp = CreateObject("Excel.Application")
objXLApp.Visible = false
Set objXLWb = objXLApp.Workbooks.Open("C:Robusta_Projectxxxxyz.xlsx")
Set oSheet = objXLWb.Worksheets("Summary") 
oSheet.Visible = xlSheetHidden			  
objXLWb.save
objXLWb.close false
objXLApp.Quit
Set objXLWb = nothing
Set objXLApp = nothing

If windows script version message is not wanted to appear in the result variable,

cscript //NoLogo

command should be added to the first line.

User custom log

This activity enables the user to receive custom preference log information.


*Log message in json formatLog message in json format. Needs to fill custom index
*Log message in text formatLog message in Text format. Pushes default index transaction-detail
IndexMonitoring Index Name. ( Default is transaction-detail)
Continue on errorThe option to continue if an error occurs during logging is selected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Log message in json format as shown in the example.

{ “cityCode” : “IST”, “cityName” : “Istanbul” } ${LogMessage}

You can use the Log message in text format as shown in the example.

customLog2

You can use the Index as shown in the example.

custom-logger-test

Windows System

Windows System activities allow users to conduct a number of operations in Windows.

Is window exists

The “Is window exists” activity checks if a specified window is currently open on the screen.


*Window titleTitle of the window to work on. It supports wildcard (*,?) characters on search operations.
Match typeThe desired option can be chosen when searching by Window title.
*Result variable nameThe Result variable is used to store the output of the “Window Exists” activity.

Type: Boolean
Possible Values:
true: The specified window is found.
false: The specified window is not found.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Window title as shown in the example.

Untitled – Notepad – Matches with values matching the exact title “Untitled – Notepad”

*Note* – Matches with values containing “Note”

*Notepad – Matches with values ending with “Notepad”

Untitled* – Matches with values starting with “Untitled”

You can use the Match type as shown in the examples.

equals starts ends contains HIDE

SHOW

RESTORE

MINIMIZE

MAXIMIXE

Window actions

Windows actions activity allows various operations to be performed on a window.


*Window titleTitle of the window to work on. It supports wildcard (*,?) characters on search operations.
Window actionType of action to be performed on the window.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Window title as shown in the example.

Untitled – Notepad – Matches with values matching the exact title “Untitled – Notepad”

*Note* – Matches with values containing “Note”

*Notepad – Matches with values ending with “Notepad”

Untitled* – Matches with values starting with “Untitled”

You can use the Window action as shown in the examples.

ACTIVATE

HIDE

SHOW

RESTORE

MINIMIZE

MAXIMIXE

Get Active Window Title

The “Get Active Window Title” activity finds the title of the window that was active while the process was running.


*Active window titleVariable name used to store the active window title
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Active window title name as shown in the example.

storeTitle

Generate random password

Generate random password activity is used to create a unique password.


Password lengthPassword length to be generated.
Uppercase countUppercase count to be generated.
Lowercase countLowercase count to be generated.
Numeric char countNumeric char count to be generated.
Special char countSpecial char count to be generated.
*PasswordResult variable name of the generated secure password.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Password length as shown in the example.

15

You can use the Uppercase count as shown in the examples.

3

You can use the Lowercase count as shown in the examples.

2

You can use the Numeric char count as shown in the examples.

2

You can use the Special char count as shown in the examples.

2

You can use the Special char count as shown in the examples.

Password

Set secured value

Set secured value activity allows that the information defined in the Orchestrator Secured key module is used in the process.


*Secure valueThe variable name to which the information is assigned.
*KeyThe Vault value is invoked.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Secure value as shown in the example.

secureValue

You can use the Key count as shown in the examples.

vault(TEST,TEST)

Get credential

Get credential activity retrieves information of Generic Credentials defined in Windows Credential Manager.


*Generic credential nameCredential name.
*Result variable nameResult variable name of the credential.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Generic credential name as shown in the example.

test2.gmail

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the examples.

credentialResult

Schedule

Schedule activities provide the planning of another process and / or itself within the processes (in terms of working frequency, runtime, start-end dates, etc.). In this way, each process and / or itself can be planned in small pieces if desired.

Schedule process

It enables different processes and/or itself to be triggered within a process, at the desired frequency, time, start and end interval. Each triggered process runs by specifing the desired time period like a small process (Child process).


Run onceIt allows the process to be run once. This field is selected depending on the usage.
Run immadiately Allows the process to run immediately. This field is selected depending on the usage.
*Process keyThe “Model Key” information of the process to be triggered is entered. The Model Key field is the field filled in while creating the process.
App key“App key” information is entered in this field. App key also must containt level keys. Lower dash(_) must be written from top to lower level.
Example ; TopLevel_MiddleLevel_SubLevel_Appkey
PrioritySet the priority order of the processes.
Example ; 40
Quartz definitionThis field is used to specify how often, when / in what time frame the process will run. The expression to be written in this field must be in the form of a Cron expression called “CRON/CRONTAB Expressions”.
Start dateThe start date of the process to be triggered is entered. Date and time that will be entered can’t be older than the time when process run. It can be scheduled for a future date.
End dateThe expiration date of the process to be triggered is entered.
Worker nameName of the worker.
Example ; MyWorker
Retry countThe number of attempts is written, can be any numeric value.
ParametersThe parameters to be sent to the triggered process are written in JSON format. JSON format allows more than one variable to take value and send it to the relevant process as parameters.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Process key as shown in the example.

ICU_Process

You can use the Quartz Definition as shown in the example.

0 * *? * * // – By writing this statement, the process is run every minute. Details and different examples of Cron/Crontab expressions are given below.

You can use the Start date as shown in the example.

YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss

You can use the End date as shown in the example.

YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss

You can use the Worker name as shown in the example.

MyWorker

You can use the Parameters as shown in the example.

In this example, let’s assume that there is an expression written in JSON format as {“from”: “${sender}”, “to”: “${recipient}”, “message”: “${message}”} in the parameters field. In this expression, it is seen that more than one variable to be created according to usage is created and takes values. The “from, to, message” expressions in the expression show how many variables will be used in the process to be triggered. These naming can be made upon request. The values of these variables are the expressions shown as “${sender}, ${recipient}, ${message}”. These values will be sent as parameters to the triggered process and will be used as variables in the process with the same name.

Cron/Crontabs expressions allow command, script and app to run in the specified time or time interval. By using these expressions in Scheduled process, time management can made easily.

Cron/Crontabs expressions consist of characters like *(asterisk), number, over-bar(-) etc. Each character has a different meaning. Parts that will not be used are expressed with * (Asterisk).

Example 1: Let’s create a crontab expression that will run every 10 minutes.

  1. .——————- Second (0 – 59)
  2. | .—————- Minute (0 – 59)
  3. | | .————- Hour (0 – 23)
  4. | | | .———- Day of the month (1 – 31)
  5. | | | | .——- Month (1 – 12)
  6. | | | | | .—- Weekdays (0 – 6) (Sunday=0 or 7)
  7. | | | | | | |- Year
  8. * * * * * * // The crontab command to run

Example 2: Let’s create a crontab expression that will run every midday at 12:00 and every evening at 18:00.

  1. Let the Crontab expression 00 09-18 * * * *
  2. 00 – Every hour (00 clock start)
  3. 09-18 – From 9 A.M to 18 P.M (09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
  4. * – Every day
  5. * – Every month
  6. * – Weekdays
  7. * – Year

Example 3: Let’s create a crontab expression that will run every at 12:00 noon and 18:00 p.m.

  1. Let the Crontab expression 00 09-18 * * 1-5
  2. 00 – Every hour (00 clock start)
  3. 09-18 – From 9 A.M to 18 P.M every hour (09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18)
  4. * – Every day
  5. * – Every month
  6. 1-5 – Monday (1), Tuesday (2), Wednesday (3), Thursday (4), Friday (5)
  7. * – Year

If we detail the examples above and increase them

StatementExplanationSecondMinuteHourDay of MonthMonthDay of WeekYear
* * * ? * *Every second*** ?**
0 * * ? * *Every minute00* ?**
0 */2 * ? * *Every couple of minutes (2,4,…)0*/2* ?**
0 1/2 * ? * *Every single minute (1, 3,…)01/2* ?**

Can create those expressions.

For detailed information, visit https://www.freeformatter.com/cron-expression-generator-quartz.html#crongenerator.

Ssh

Ssh activities connect to a server and allows some file and command operations to be performed on the server.

Connect

Connect activity is used for connecting to a Ssh server.


*Session nameReference name of session which will be connected.
*UsernameThe name of user who will connect to server.
*PasswordThe password of user who will connect to server.
*HostThe IP of server that will be connected.
PortThe port number of server that will be connected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Session name as shown in the example.

testSession

You can use the Username as shown in the example.

robusta

You can use the Password as shown in the example.

sifre12345

You can use the Host as shown in the example.

192.10.1.1

You can use the Post as shown in the example.

The default port number is 22.

22

Execute command

Execute command activity is used for executing Linux commands in server.


*Session nameReference name of session which is given in Connect activity.
*CommandCommand to be executed in server.
*Timeout (sec)Sets timeout period for generating error message and ending the process.
Command resultIf there is a value of command field, it is assigned to name referenced.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Session name as shown in the example.

testSession

You can use the Command as shown in the example.

ssh test.server.com

You can use the Timeout (sec)as shown in the example.

8

You can use the Command result as shown in the example.

pwdResult

Get file

Get file activity is used for downloading the specified file from server.


*Session nameReference name of session which will is given in the Connect activity.
*Remote file namePath of the remote file name that will be downloaded.
“Local file namePath of the local file name for downloaded files.
OverwriteOverwrite if there is a file or folder with the same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Session name as shown in the example.

testSession

You can use the Remote file name as shown in the example.

/home/username/TestFolder/Get_File_Test.txt

You can use the Local file name as shown in the example.

C:Temp

Put file

Put file activity is used for uploading the specified file to server.


*Session nameReference name of session which will be give in the Connect activity.
*Local file namePath of the local file name that will be downloaded.
*Remote file namePath of the remote file name for downloaded files.
OverwriteOverwrite if there is a file or folder with the same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Session name as shown in the example.

testSession

You can use the Local file name as shown in the example.

C:TempGet_File_Test.txt

You can use the Remote file name as shown in the example.

/home/username/TestFolder/

Disconnect

Connect activity is used for disconnecting from a Ssh server.


*Session nameReference name of session which will be connected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Session name as shown in the example.

${testSession}

Ftp

Ftp activities enable users to perform different operations like creating file, copying file and renaming.

Connect

Connect activity enables to connect to FTP server.


*Connection nameReference name of connection that will be connected.
UsernameFTP username.
PasswordFTP password.
Private key filePrivate key file name with path.
*HostHost information.
*PortThe information of FTP connection point (port).
Is secureIf connection is secure then connection type will be sftp, else connection type will be ftp.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

ftpConnection

You can use the Username as shown in the example.

robustaserver

You can use the Password as shown in the example.

Password123

You can use the Private key fileas shown in the example.

C:UsersDocumentsppFile.ppk

You can use the Host as shown in the example.

10.10.10.10

You can use the Port as shown in the example.

22

If connection is secure then port cannot be 21 and if connection is not secure then port cannot be 22.

You can use the Is secure as shown in the example.

True

If connection is secure then connection type will be sftp, else connection type will be ftp.

Create directory

Create directory activity is used for creating a new directory.


“Connection nameReference name of connection which will be connected.
*Directory nameDirectory name with path.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

${ftpConnection}

You can use the Directory name as shown in the example.

/home/Temp/Test

Change directory

Change directory activity is used for changing current directory.


“Connection nameReference name of connection which will be connected.
*Directory nameDestination path without a file or folder name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

${ftpConnection}

You can use the Directory name as shown in the example.

/home/Temp/Test

Rename

Rename activity is used for changing file or folder name in FTP server.


“Connection nameReference name of connection which will be connected.
*Current nameCurrent name of file or folder with path.
*New nameNew name of file or folder with path.
OverwriteOverwrite if there is a file or folder with same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

${ftpConnection}

You can use the Current name as shown in the example.

/home/Temp/Test

You can use the New name as shown in the example.

/home/Temp/Test2

You can use the Overwrite as shown in the example.

True

Download

Download activity is used for downloading a file in FTP server.


“Connection nameReference name of connection which will be connected.
*Remote file namePath of the remote file name that will be downloaded.
*Local file namePath of the local file name for downloaded files.
OverwriteOverwrite if there is a file or folder with same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

${ftpConnection}

You can use the Remote file name as shown in the example.

/home/Temp/ftpTest.xlsx

You can use the Local file name as shown in the example.

C:TempTestftpTest.xlsx

You can use the Overwrite as shown in the example.

True

Upload

Upload activity is used for uploading a file to FTP server.


“Connection nameReference name of connection which will be connected.
*Local file namePath of the local file name that will be uploaded.
*Remote file namePath of the remote file name for uploaded files.
OverwriteOverwrite if there is a file or folder with same name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

${ftpConnection}

You can use the Local file name as shown in the example.

C:TempTestftpTest.xlsx

You can use the Remote file name as shown in the example.

/home/Temp/ftpTest.xlsx

You can use the Overwrite as shown in the example.

True

Delete

Delete activity is used for deleting a file or folder in FTP server.


“Connection nameReference name of connection which will be connected.
*File nameFile name with path.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

${ftpConnection}

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

/home/Temp/Test/ftpTest.xlsx

List files

List files activity is used for listing the file names in specified location.


“Connection nameReference name of connection that will be connected.
*Directory nameDirectory name with path.
*Dataset nameReference name of the dataset which will be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

${ftpConnection}

You can use the Directory name as shown in the example.

✔ C:RobustaTempExpressInvoice

Don’t forget to put “” at the end

C:RobustaTempExpressInvoice

You can use the Dataset name as shown in the example.

ftpList

File exists

File exists activity is used for checking if a file exists or not in FTP server.


“Connection nameReference name of connection which will be connected.
*File nameFile name with path.
Result variable nameVariable of the return value.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

${ftpConnection}

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

/home/Temp/Test/ftpTest.xlsx

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

fileExist

If there is a value in file location, it returns True; if not, it returns False.

Disconnect

Disconnect activity enables to disconnect from FTP server.


*Connection nameReference name of connection that will be connected.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

${ftpConnection}/direction]

Cryptography

Cryptography activities are used to communicate securely in the presence of third parties.

Encryption

Encryption activity ensures that an intelligible data is made incomprehensible with the encryption method. Encryption is a double-sided encryption method, that is, an encrypted data can be decrypted with a key.


*Plain textUnencrypted string is written.
*Encryption typeThe method to be encrypted is selected.
*Result cipher textThe variable name of the directory that we want to be encrypted is written in an encrypted way.
*KeyKey information of the data to be encrypted is given.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Plain text as shown in the examples.

Hello, this is the text string I want encrypted.

You can use the Encryption type as shown in the examples.

AES

DES

TripleDES

You can use the Result cipher text as shown in the example.

decryptionData

You can define a key from using Generate key activity or you can define a key from using any key creator tool.

AES accepts 16 or 32 bits keys.

DES accepts 8 bits keys.

TripleMES accepts 24 bits keys.

Decryption

Decryption activity ensures that a data that has been rendered incomprehensible by the encryption method is made comprehensible.the encryption method. Encryption is a double-sided encryption method, that is, an encrypted data can be decrypted with a key.


*Ciper textThis is the field where the encrypted variable name should be written in the Encryption activity.
*Decryption type The encrypted method is selected.
*Result plain textIt is the variable field where the decrypted data will be written.
*KeyThe key information given in the Encryption activity is given in the same way.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Cliper text as shown in the examples.

${encryptedData}

You can use the Decryption type as shown in the examples.

AES

DES

TripleDES

You can use the Result plain text as shown in the example.

encryptedData

You can define a key from using Generate key activity or you can define a key from using any key creator tool.

AES accepts 16 or 32 bits keys.

DES accepts 8 bits keys.

TripleMES accepts 24 bits keys.

Hash

Hash activity ensures that an intelligible data is made incomprehensible with the encryption method. Hashing is a one-sided encryption method, that is, an encrypted data cannot be recovered. It is mostly used in comparison situations.


*Plain textUnencrypted string is written.
*Hash typeThe method to be encrypted is selected.
*Result cipher textEnter the name of the variable that we want the directory to be encrypted in an encrypted way.
*KeyKey information of the data to be encrypted is given.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Plain text as shown in the examples.

Hello, this is the text string I want encrypted.

You can use the Hash type as shown in the examples.

MD5

HmacSHA512

You can use the Result cipher text as shown in the example.

encryptedData

You can use the Key as shown in the examples.

MD5: Desired lenght


HmacSHA512: Desired lenght

Generate key

Generate key activity allows to generate encryption key. An encryption key is a random string of bits generated to scramble and decrypt data.


*Encription typeThe method to create the key is selected.
*Result keyThe name of the variable whose key is to be transferred.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Encryption as shown in the examples.

AES

DES

TripleDES

You can use the Result key as shown in the example.

generatedKey

Computer Vision

Computer Vision activites are used to perform operations that a human can do visually with a computer system.

Get dominant color

Get dominant color activity finds the dominant color in an image so that images can be categorized by color.


*Image file nameImage file name with path.
*Result variable nameVariable name to be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Image file name as shown in the examples.

C:TempmyImage.jpg

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the examples.

newVariable

Image matching

Image matching activity is used to search for an image on a given source image. Starting from the X-Y point on the image, a search is made in an area equal to the determined width and height. If there is a match, the coordinate (X-Y) of the center point of the searched image on the searched image and the width/height values are assigned to the determined result variables. When x-position, y-position, width and height values aren’t entered, a search is made in the whole image.


*Source imageSource image file name with path.
*Source image Base64Source image with base64 string. If image and its path are given in Source image field, Source image Base64 must not be used. In case of using it, an error will be returned.
*Searched image File name and path of the image to be searched.
*Searched image Base64Searched image with base64 string.
X-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the image to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the Y-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
Y-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the image to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
WidthIf it is desired to limit the image to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Height fields.
HeightIf it is desired to limit the image to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Width fields.
Start scaleIf it is desired to try again when the searched image is not found on the image, the Start Scale field is filled. Specifies the start scale. Scale statements are double-type numbers (0.1, 0.5, 2.0).
End scaleIf it is desired to try again when the searched image is not found on the image, the Start Scale field is filled. Specifies the end scale. Scale statements are double-type numbers (0.1, 0.5, 2.0).
Scale stepIf it is desired to try again when the searched image is not found on the image, the Start Scale field is filled. Specifies the progression coefficient. Specifies the progression coefficient.
Match scoreImages are matched if their similarity percentage is higher than the match score.
*Return x-positionIf the image matches, the x-coordinate of the center point of the searched image is assigned to this variable.
*Return y-positionIf the image matches, the y-coordinate of the center point of the searched image is assigned to this variable.
*Return heightIf the image matches, the height of the center point of the searched image is assigned to this variable.
*Return widthIf the image matches, the width of the center point of the searched image is assigned to this variable.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Source image as shown in the examples.

C:Robustarobusta.png

You can use the Source image Base64 as shown in the example.

iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAA…

You can use the Searched image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta_logo.png

You can use the Searched image Base64 as shown in the examples.

iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAA…

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the examples.

250

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the examples.

170

You can use the Width as shown in the examples.

100

You can use the Width as shown in the examples.

75

You can use the Start scale as shown in the examples.

1.0

You can use the End scale as shown in the examples.

2.0

You can use the End scale as shown in the examples.

0.1

You can use the Match score as shown in the example.

0.80

You can use the Return x-position as shown in the examples.

x

You can use the Return y-position as shown in the examples.

y

You can use the Return height as shown in the examples.

h

You can use the Return width as shown in the examples.

w

The values for height and width must be an integer.

Compare histogram

Compare histogram activity is used to find similarity in images based on RGB values.


*Image 1It is the field where the index information, file name and extension of the image to be compared are entered.
*Image 2It is the field where the index information, file name and extension of the image to be compared are entered.
*Result variable nameThe name of the variable to which the comparison result is to be transferred. The returned value is the percentage value (70.82, 50.0).
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Image 1 as shown in the example.

C:RobustablueCar.png

You can use the Image 2 as shown in the example.

C:Robustalandscape.png

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

histogramValue

Text matching

The “Text Matching” activity uses optical character recognition (OCR) technology to locate and match specific text within a target area on the screen. This activity is useful for automating tasks that involve interacting with text in images or on the screen.


*Source imageSource image file name with path.
*Source image Base64Source image with base64 string.
*TextSpecifies the exact text string that the activity should search for within the target area. This text is used by the OCR engine to locate matching text on the screen.
LanguageSpecifies the language of the text to be recognized by the OCR engine. Setting the appropriate language improves the accuracy of text recognition. ENG / TR
X-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the text to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the Y-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
Y-coordinateIf it is desired to limit the text to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Height, and Width fields.
WidthIf it is desired to limit the image to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Height fields.
HeightIf it is desired to limit the image to be searched on the screen within a certain area; this field must be filled in, along with the X-coordinate, Y-coordinate and Width fields.
Retry countThe number of tries until the image is found, could be any numeric value.
*Return x-positionIf the text matches, the x-coordinate of the center point of the searched text is assigned to this variable.
*Return y-positionIf the text matches, the y-coordinate of the center point of the searched text is assigned to this variable.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Source image as shown in the examples.

C:Robustarobusta.png

You can use the Source image Base64 as shown in the example.

iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAA…

You can use the Text as shown in the example.

Submit

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the examples.

250

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the examples.

170

You can use the Width as shown in the examples.

100

You can use the Width as shown in the examples.

75

You can use the Return x-position as shown in the examples.

x

You can use the Return y-position as shown in the examples.

y

The values for height and width must be an integer.

Count non zero

Count non zero activity shows the black and white dispersion ratio in image files.


*Input imageFile name with path.
*Result variable nameThe dispersion ratio is assigned to this variable.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:RobustaCar.png

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

{“ratio”:1.3,”black”:6,”white”:450}

Mean

Mean activity finds the mean value of the RGB values, in other words, returns RGB color distribution in image.


*Input imageFile name with path.
*Result variable nameIt is the variable to which black and non black pixels in an image will be assigned.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:RobustablueCar.png

You can use the Result variable name as shown in the example.

{“blue”:128.55,”green”:128.55,”red”:128.55}

Base64 encoder

Base64 encoder activity converts an image file to base64 format.


*File nameFile name with path.
*Result base64 file nameResult base64 file name.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the File name as shown in the example.

C:RobustablueCar.png

Captcha solver (AzCAPTCHA)

Captcha is a service used for the analysis of security measures used for human and computer separation. Captcha solver activities solves captcha’s and returns the results.

AzCAPTCHA activity, uses AZcaptcha’s automated online captcha solver API service. You need an account and make payment to use Azcaptha’s services. You can find detailed information about creating an account and payment options from Azcaptcha’s website.


*Captcha keyAPI key of AzCAPTCHA’s subscription.
*FilePath, name and extension of image that will be solved.
*Response variable nameVariable name to store image that is solved.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Captcha key as shown in the example.

asds8dfcsf125dsdsfds5dasdasa3tyf

You can use the File as shown in the example.

C:SampleRobustacaptcha.png

You need to give the file path of image the captcha. To do that you need to download the capthca image to worker’s local file system. You can download the image using “Take Capture” activity, “Download File” activity or “Save screen capture” activity whichever is suitable for your process.

You can use the Response variable name as shown in the example.

captchaResult

AzCAPTCHA activity only solve image captchas. You cannot solve Google Recaptcha captchas with AzCAPTCHA activity. To solve Google Recaptcha’s you need use Captcha solver (ReCAPTCHA) activity.

Captcha solver (BestCAPTCHA)

Captcha is a service used for the analysis of security measures used for human and computer separation. Captcha solver activities solves captcha’s and returns the results.

BestCaptcha activity, uses BestCaptcha’s automated online captcha solver API service. You need an account and add credit to use BestCaptcha’s services. You can find detailed information about creating an account and payment options from BestCaptcha’s website.


*Access tokenAPI key of BestCaptcha’s subscription.
*TemplateImage file name with path or base64 string.
Case sensitive(True/False) Uppercase and lowercase letters are treated as distinct of equivalent.
*Response variable nameVariable name to store image that is solved.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Access token as shown in the example.

asds8dfcsf125dsdsfds5dasdasa3tyf

You can use the Template as shown in the example.

C:SampleRobustacaptcha.png

You need to give a file path of image the captcha or you need to enter the base64 string of the captcha image. To do that you need to download the capthca image to worker’s local file system. You can download the image using “Take Capture” activity, “Download File” activity or “Save screen capture” activity whichever is suitable for your process. You can also use the “Base64 encoder” activity to create the base64 string.

You can use the Response variable name as shown in the example.

captchaResult

BestCapthca activity only solve image captchas. You cannot solve Google Recaptcha captchas with BestCaptcha activity. To solve Google Recaptcha’s you need use Captcha solver (ReCAPTCHA) activity.

Captcha solver (ReCAPTCHA)

Captcha is a service used for the analysis of security measures used for human and computer separation. Captcha solver activities solves captcha’s and returns the results.

ReCaptcha activity, uses BestCaptcha’s automated online captcha solver API service. You need an account and add credit to use BestCaptcha’s services. You can find detailed information about creating an account and payment options from BestCaptcha’s website.


*Application nameName of application which has already been opened or attached.
*Access tokenAPI key of BestCaptcha’s subscription.
Recaptcha fieldThe XPath of the HTML element containing the recaptcha id used in the website is written. By inspecting the page, the element containing the recaptcha data-sitekey tag is searched and the XPath of that element is obtained.
Submit button fieldIn this optional field, if it is necessary to press the submit button after the recaptcha is resolved (in some sites, it is necessary not to press it so that the recaptcha is not reset), the XPath of this button is entered.
Callback function nameThis optional field is used for solving Hidden recaptcha. It can be needed in the background recaptchas on the site.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Application name as shown in the example.

${myApp}

You can use the Access token as shown in the example.

70EBF…..

You can use the Recaptcha field as shown in the example.

//*[@id=”g-recaptcha”]

You can use the Submit button field as shown in the example.

//*[@id=”automation..]

You can use the Callback function name field as shown in the example.

check

Note: This optional field is used to solve the hidden recaptcha. It may be needed in the background recaptchas on the site. In some cases, after the recaptcha is resolved, pressing the submit button resets the recaptcha and starts again. In order to avoid this situation, a javascript function needs to be triggered in the background after the captcha is successfully resolved. It is necessary to write the name of this function in this field, and the name of the function appears in the element tag named data-callback. In this example you can see that “data-callback” equals to “check”, it may get various names on other websites.

Barcode reader

Barcode reader activity finds and analyzes the barcode on the given image.


*Image file nameImage file name with path.
*New dataset nameReference name of dataset which will be created.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Image file name as shown in the example.

C:Robustabarcode.png

You can use the New dataset name as shown in the example.

barcodeResult

Barcode reader activity returns dataset since the activity reads more than one barcode in a given image at the same time. Barcodes are assigned to variable by getting through dataset.

QR code reader

QR code reader activity finds and analyzes the QR code on the given image.


*Image file nameImage file name with path.
*Response variable nameVariable name to store QR code value.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Image file name as shown in the example.

C:Robustaqr.png

You can use the Response variable name as shown in the example.

qrResult

Get largest rectangle

Get largest rectangle activity is used for getting the largest rectangle-shaped object in an image.


*Image file nameName and path of image file.
*Return x-positionFinal x-position, variable name defined to assign the x-coordinate found.
*Return y-position
Final y-position, variable name defined to assign the y-coordinate found.
*Return widthFinal width, variable name defined to assign the width found.
*Return heightFinal height, variable name defined to assign the heightfound.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Image file image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.png

You can use the Return x-position as shown in the example.

xPositonvalue

You can use the Return y-position as shown in the example.

yPositonvalue

You can use the Return width as shown in the example.

widthValue

You can use the Return height as shown in the example.

heightValue

You can use Return x-position and Return y-position variables in Mouse activity in Keyboard & Mouse Operations.

In the example above, the coordinates of the text specified in the Text field will be scanned and a value will be returned to the xPositionValue and yPositionValue variables (For example: 300,280). When we select LEFT_CLICK from the combobox in the Action field of the Mouse Activity and write these returned variables as $ {xPositionValue} and $ {xPositionValue} into the X Position and Y Position fields, the returned values 300 and 280 will be used in the Mouse activity with the variable. As a result of the operation, left mouse click will be performed on the text specified in the Text field.

base64 decoder

Base64 decoder activity decodes an image from base64 format.


*Base64 stringbase64 string that will be converted to an image file.
*Result file nameName and path of image file that will be decoded from base64 string.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

ebfbnrjrygw354646ıkghascagsr

You can use the Result file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustablueCar.png

Get dimensions

Get dimensions activity is used getting the dimensions of an image file.


*Image file nameName and path of image file.
*Return widthFinal width, variable name defined to assign the width found.
*Return heightFinal height, variable name defined to assign the heightfound.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Image file image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.png

You can use the Return width as shown in the example.

widthValue

You can use the Return height as shown in the example.

heightValue

MRZ reader

MRZ reader activity is used for reading MRZ field in passports and id cards.


*MRZ stringMRZ string value.
*Image file namePath and name of image file.
*Response variable nameVariable name to store HTTP response.

You can use the MRZ string as shown in the example.

I<NATSURNAME<<NAME1<NAME2<<<<<<<<<<<1234567890NAT1212920F1212150<<<<<<<0

You can use the Image file name as shown in the example.

C:RobustaCar.png

You can use the Response variable name as shown in the example.

httpVariable

An example response is as follows.

"checkDateOfBirth":"2","country":"UTO","checkNumber":"6","checkPersonalNumber":"1","serialNumber":"18","documentNumber":"98902C3","sex":"F","dateOfBirth":"740812","personalNumber":"ZE184226B<<<<<","type":"P<","number":"1898902C3","checkExpirationDate":"9","names":"ANNA MARIA","nationality":"UTO","checkComposit":"0","surname":"ERIKSSON","mrzString":"P<UTOERIKSSON<<ANNA<MARIA<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<n1898902C36UT07408122F1204159ZE184226B<<<<<10n","expirationDate":"120415"}"

Image Processing

Image Processing activities enable users to process or enhance images.

Gray scale

Gray scale activity is a method to convert an image to black&white or monochrome.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:TempRobustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:TempRobustagrayscale.jpg

Threshold

Threshold activity is used for increasing or decreasing noise in images.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
Threshold typeMethods for increasing or decreasing noise in images.
Minimum valueMinimum value of threshold coefficient range.
Maximum valueMaximum value of threshold coefficient range.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustagrayscale.jpg

You can use the Threshold type as shown in the examples.

Thresh_Binary : The threshold value is compared to each pixel’s value in the image, and pixels that exceed a certain threshold value are set to white while the remaining pixels are set to black.

Thresh_Binary_Inv : The threshold value is compared to each pixel’s value in the image, and pixels that exceed a certain threshold value are set to black while the remaining pixels are set to white.

Thresh_Trunc : The threshold value is compared to each pixel’s value in the image, and pixels that exceed a certain threshold value are set to this threshold value, while higher pixel values are preserved

Thresh_Tozero : The threshold value is compared to each pixel’s value in the image, and pixels that exceed a certain threshold value are preserved, while the remaining pixels are set to zero

Thresh_Tozero_Inv : The threshold value is compared to each pixel’s value in the image, and pixels that exceed a certain threshold value are set to zero, while the remaining pixels are preserved

Thresh_Otsu : The Otsu threshold determines an optimal threshold value using a histogram analysis method to achieve the best separation of object pixel density in the image

You can use the Minimum value as shown in the example.

50

The default value is 50.

You can use the Maximum value as shown in the example.

255

The default value is 255.

INPUT

OUTPUTS

Note: The maximum value is 255 and the min value is 170.

Note: The maximum value is 255 and the min value is 170.

Note: The maximum value is 255 and the min value is 170.

Note: The maximum value is 255 and the min value is 170.

Note: The maximum value is 255 and the min value is 170.

Blur

Blur activity is used for applying blurring effects to images.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
Blur typeThe methods to increase or decrease blurring on image.
Blur coefficientImage gets more blurry as the blur coefficient increases.
X-coordinateX-coordinate of the area to be edited or cropped.
Y-coordinateY-coordinate of the area to be edited or cropped.
WidthWidth of the area to be edited or cropped.
HeightHeight of the area to be edited or cropped.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustagrayscale.jpg

You can use the Blur type as shown in the example.

Homogeneous_Blur : Homogeneous Blur averages each pixel’s value with its neighboring pixels.

Gaussian_Blur : Gaussian Blur convolves each pixel’s value with a Gaussian kernel to blur the image.

Median_Blur : Median Blur replaces each pixel’s value with the median of its neighboring pixels.

You can use the Blur coefficient as shown in the example.

9

The default value is 9.

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the example.

86

You can use the Y-coordinate as shown in the example.

100

You can use the Width as shown in the example.

67

You can use the Height as shown in the example.

67

Sharpen

Sharpen activity is used for increasing or decreasing the sharpness of image.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
Sharpen coefficientImage gets sharper as the sharpen coefficient increases.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustagrayscale.jpg

You can use the Sharpen coefficient as shown in the example.

7

The default number is 7.

Brighten

Brighten activity is used for increasing or decreasing the brighten of image.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
Brightness levelImage gets brighter as the brightness level increases, value range is between 1 and 255. Image gets darker as the brightness level decreases for negative values, value range is between -255 and -1.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustagrayscale.jpg

You can use the Brightness level as shown in the example.

50

Contrast

Contrast activity is used for increasing or decreasing image contrast.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
Contrast LevelImage becomes brighter as the contrast level increases.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustagrayscale.jpg

You can use the Contrast level as shown in the example.

Values from 1 to 255 can be entered to increase the picture contrast.

177

A value from 1 to 0 can be entered to reduce the picture contrast.

0.5

Default Value is 1.2

Erode

Erode (erosion) activity is used to make thin the areas in the image.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
Erode coefficientImage gets more eroded as the erode coefficient increases. Default value is 9.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustagrayscale.jpg

You can use the Erode coefficient as shown in the example.

50

Dilate

Dilate (dilation) activity is used to expand the thin-seeming parts.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
Dilate coefficientImage gets more dilated as the dilate coefficient increases. Default value is 9.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustagrayscale.jpg

You can use the Dilate coefficient as shown in the example.

50

Remove lines

Remove lines activity is used for removing lines in image.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
Enhance Text?If the checkbox is selected, it prevents deformations caused by removing the intersecting lines.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustagrayscale.jpg

Deskew

Deskew activity is used for compensating for skewing in scanned images.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:TempRobustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:TempRobustadeskew.jpg

Rotate

Rotate activity is used for rotating images.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
RotationDirection that image will be rotated.
Rotation degreeDegree to which the image will be rotated. It must be an integer value between 0-180 and must be used when rotate right or rotate left options are chosen.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustagrayscale.jpg

You can use the Rotation as shown in the example.

ROTATE_90_CLOCKWISE : rotates the image 90 degrees clockwise.

ROTATE_180 : rotates the image 180 degrees.

ROTATE_90_COUNTERCLOCKWISE : rotates the image 90 degrees counterclockwise.

You can use the Rotation degree as shown in the example.

45 120

Flip

Flip activity is used to flip images in the mirror direction.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
Flix axisAxis that image will be reflected over.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustaflipped.jpg

You can use the Flip axis as shown in the example.

Y_AXIS

X_AXIS

X_AND_Y_AXIS

Resize

Resize activity is used for enlarging or reducing image to the desired size.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
ProportionValue to resize the image proportionally.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustagrayscale.jpg

You can use the Proportion as shown in the example.

1.25

Crop

Crop activity is used for cropping the specified portion of image.


*Input imagePath file name and extension of the image that will be processed.
*Output imagePath, file name and extension of the image that is processed.
X-coordinateX-coordinate of the area to be edited or cropped.
Y-coordinateY-coordinate of the area to be edited or cropped.
WidthWidth of the area to be edited or cropped.
HeightHeight of the area to be edited or cropped.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the Input image as shown in the example.

C:Robustarobusta.jpg

You can use the Output image name as shown in the example.

C:Robustagrayscale.jpg

You can use the X-coordinate as shown in the example.

120

You can use the Y-coordinate as shown in the example.

250

You can use the Width as shown in the example.

100

You can use the Height as shown in the example.

50

Google Cloud Vision

Google Cloud Vision component uses Google Cloud Vision API. Vision API offers powerful pre-trained machine learning models. To use the Google Cloud Vision component and its activities, you need a Google Cloud account and an appropriate subscription to access the API key. Some of the Google Cloud Vision features are free to use. You can learn more information from Google Cloud Vision documentation. All activity responses are in the JSON format.

Note: Google Vision API only accepts Google Storage files or image files in Base64 formats. You need to upload your local image files to Google Cloud Storage, or you can encode your image files in Base64 format. If you don’t want to use Google Cloud Storage, you can use the Base64 Encoder activity to encode your local image files.

Text detection

Text detection activity detects words from image files. It uses optical character recognition (OCR) technology. The results are JSON format, including the entire extracted string, individual words, and their bounding boxes.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Google Cloud Vision text detection features.

*Api keyGoogle Cloud Vision API Key
*Image path/urlImage Google Cloud Storage url
*Base64Image file’s Base64 String
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response

Note: You can either use Image path/url or Base64 field in your process.

You can use the Api key as shown in the example.

bb3c53c6-8515-4e34-97c8-8281de60972d

You can use the Image path/url as shown in the example.

gs://cloud-samples-data/vision/ocr/sampleimage.jpg

You can use the Base64 as shown in the example.

/9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAQEAYABgAAD/2wBDAAMCAgMCAgMDAwMEAwMEBQgFBQQEBQoHBwYIDAoMDAsKCwsNDhIQDQ4RDgsLEBYQERMUFRUVDA8XGBYUGBIUFRT/2wBDAQMEBAUEBQkFBQkUDQsNFBQUF……………./58x/8BX+R/9k=

You can use the Response variable name fileas shown in the example.

getRespone

Object recognition

Object recognition activity can detect and extract multiple object with object localization. Object localization identifies multiple objects in an image and provides a LocalizedObjectAnnotation for each object in the image. Each LocalizedObjectAnnotation identifies information about the object, the position of the object, and rectangular bounds for the region of the image that contains the object.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Google Cloud Vision dedect multiple objects features.

*Api keyGoogle Cloud Vision API Key
*Image path/urlImage Google Cloud Storage url
*Base64Image file’s Base64 String
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response

Note: You can either use Image path/url or Base64 field in your process.

You can use the Api key as shown in the example.

bb3c53c6-8515-4e34-97c8-8281de60972d

You can use the Image path/url as shown in the example.

gs://cloud-samples-data/vision/ocr/sampleimage.jpg

You can use the Base64 as shown in the example.

/9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAQEAYABgAAD/2wBDAAMCAgMCAgMDAwMEAwMEBQgFBQQEBQoHBwYIDAoMDAsKCwsNDhIQDQ4RDgsLEBYQERMUFRUVDA8XGBYUGBIUFRT/2wBDAQMEBAUEBQkFBQkUDQsNFBQUF……………./58x/8BX+R/9k=

You can use the Response variable name fileas shown in the example.

getRespone

Image properties detection

Image properties detection activity detects general attributes of the image, such as dominant color.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Google Cloud Vision detect image properties features.

*Api keyGoogle Cloud Vision API Key
*Image path/urlImage Google Cloud Storage url
*Base64Image file’s Base64 String
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response

Note: You can either use Image path/url or Base64 field in your process.

You can use the Api key as shown in the example.

bb3c53c6-8515-4e34-97c8-8281de60972d

You can use the Image path/url as shown in the example.

gs://cloud-samples-data/vision/ocr/sampleimage.jpg

You can use the Base64 as shown in the example.

/9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAQEAYABgAAD/2wBDAAMCAgMCAgMDAwMEAwMEBQgFBQQEBQoHBwYIDAoMDAsKCwsNDhIQDQ4RDgsLEBYQERMUFRUVDA8XGBYUGBIUFRT/2wBDAQMEBAUEBQkFBQkUDQsNFBQUF……………./58x/8BX+R/9k=

You can use the Response variable name fileas shown in the example.

getRespone

Face detection

Face detection activity detects multiple faces within an image along with the associated key facial attributes.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Google Cloud Vision detect faces features.

*Api keyGoogle Cloud Vision API Key
*Image path/urlImage Google Cloud Storage url
*Base64Image file’s Base64 String
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response

Note: You can either use Image path/url or Base64 field in your process.

You can use the Api key as shown in the example.

bb3c53c6-8515-4e34-97c8-8281de60972d

You can use the Image path/url as shown in the example.

gs://cloud-samples-data/vision/ocr/sampleimage.jpg

You can use the Base64 as shown in the example.

/9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAQEAYABgAAD/2wBDAAMCAgMCAgMDAwMEAwMEBQgFBQQEBQoHBwYIDAoMDAsKCwsNDhIQDQ4RDgsLEBYQERMUFRUVDA8XGBYUGBIUFRT/2wBDAQMEBAUEBQkFBQkUDQsNFBQUF……………./58x/8BX+R/9k=

You can use the Response variable name fileas shown in the example.

getRespone

Label detection

Label detection activity can detect and extract information about entities in an image, across a broad group of categories. Labels can identify general objects, locations, activities, animal species, products, and more.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Google Cloud Vision detect labels features.

*Api keyGoogle Cloud Vision API Key
*Image path/urlImage Google Cloud Storage url
*Base64Image file’s Base64 String
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response

Note: You can either use Image path/url or Base64 field in your process.

You can use the Api key as shown in the example.

bb3c53c6-8515-4e34-97c8-8281de60972d

You can use the Image path/url as shown in the example.

gs://cloud-samples-data/vision/ocr/sampleimage.jpg

You can use the Base64 as shown in the example.

/9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAQEAYABgAAD/2wBDAAMCAgMCAgMDAwMEAwMEBQgFBQQEBQoHBwYIDAoMDAsKCwsNDhIQDQ4RDgsLEBYQERMUFRUVDA8XGBYUGBIUFRT/2wBDAQMEBAUEBQkFBQkUDQsNFBQUF……………./58x/8BX+R/9k=

You can use the Response variable name fileas shown in the example.

getRespone

Landmark detection

Landmark detection activity detects popular natural and human-made structures within an image.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Google Cloud Vision detect landmark features.

*Api keyGoogle Cloud Vision API Key
*Image path/urlImage Google Cloud Storage url
*Base64Image file’s Base64 String
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response

Note: You can either use Image path/url or Base64 field in your process.

You can use the Api key as shown in the example.

bb3c53c6-8515-4e34-97c8-8281de60972d

You can use the Image path/url as shown in the example.

gs://cloud-samples-data/vision/ocr/sampleimage.jpg

You can use the Base64 as shown in the example.

/9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAQEAYABgAAD/2wBDAAMCAgMCAgMDAwMEAwMEBQgFBQQEBQoHBwYIDAoMDAsKCwsNDhIQDQ4RDgsLEBYQERMUFRUVDA8XGBYUGBIUFRT/2wBDAQMEBAUEBQkFBQkUDQsNFBQUF……………./58x/8BX+R/9k=

You can use the Response variable name fileas shown in the example.

getRespone

Logo detection

Logo detection activity detects popular product logos within an image.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Google Cloud Vision detect logos features.

*Api keyGoogle Cloud Vision API Key
*Image path/urlImage Google Cloud Storage url
*Base64Image file’s Base64 String
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response

Note: You can either use Image path/url or Base64 field in your process.

You can use the Api key as shown in the example.

bb3c53c6-8515-4e34-97c8-8281de60972d

You can use the Image path/url as shown in the example.

gs://cloud-samples-data/vision/ocr/sampleimage.jpg

You can use the Base64 as shown in the example.

/9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAQEAYABgAAD/2wBDAAMCAgMCAgMDAwMEAwMEBQgFBQQEBQoHBwYIDAoMDAsKCwsNDhIQDQ4RDgsLEBYQERMUFRUVDA8XGBYUGBIUFRT/2wBDAQMEBAUEBQkFBQkUDQsNFBQUF……………./58x/8BX+R/9k=

You can use the Response variable name fileas shown in the example.

getRespone

Web detection

Web detection activity detects Web references to an image.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Google Cloud Vision detect Web entities and pages features.

*Api keyGoogle Cloud Vision API Key
*Image path/urlImage Google Cloud Storage url
*Base64Image file’s Base64 String
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response

Note: You can either use Image path/url or Base64 field in your process.

You can use the Api key as shown in the example.

bb3c53c6-8515-4e34-97c8-8281de60972d

You can use the Image path/url as shown in the example.

gs://cloud-samples-data/vision/ocr/sampleimage.jpg

You can use the Base64 as shown in the example.

/9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAQEAYABgAAD/2wBDAAMCAgMCAgMDAwMEAwMEBQgFBQQEBQoHBwYIDAoMDAsKCwsNDhIQDQ4RDgsLEBYQERMUFRUVDA8XGBYUGBIUFRT/2wBDAQMEBAUEBQkFBQkUDQsNFBQUF……………./58x/8BX+R/9k=

You can use the Response variable name fileas shown in the example.

getRespone

Crop hint detection

Crop hint detection activity suggests vertices for a crop region on an image.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Google Cloud Vision detect crop hints features.

*Api keyGoogle Cloud Vision API Key
*Image path/urlImage Google Cloud Storage url
*Base64Image file’s Base64 String
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response

Note: You can either use Image path/url or Base64 field in your process.

You can use the Api key as shown in the example.

bb3c53c6-8515-4e34-97c8-8281de60972d

You can use the Image path/url as shown in the example.

gs://cloud-samples-data/vision/ocr/sampleimage.jpg

You can use the Base64 as shown in the example.

/9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAQEAYABgAAD/2wBDAAMCAgMCAgMDAwMEAwMEBQgFBQQEBQoHBwYIDAoMDAsKCwsNDhIQDQ4RDgsLEBYQERMUFRUVDA8XGBYUGBIUFRT/2wBDAQMEBAUEBQkFBQkUDQsNFBQUF……………./58x/8BX+R/9k=

You can use the Response variable name fileas shown in the example.

getRespone

Explicit content detection

Explicit content detection activity detects explicit content such as adult content or violent content within an image. This feature uses five categories (adult, spoof, medical, violence and racy) and returns likelihood that each is present in a given image.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Google Cloud Vision detect explicit content (SafeSearch) features.

*Api keyGoogle Cloud Vision API Key
*Image path/urlImage Google Cloud Storage url
*Base64Image file’s Base64 String
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response

Note: You can either use Image path/url or Base64 field in your process.

You can use the Api key as shown in the example.

bb3c53c6-8515-4e34-97c8-8281de60972d

You can use the Image path/url as shown in the example.

gs://cloud-samples-data/vision/ocr/sampleimage.jpg

You can use the Base64 as shown in the example.

/9j/4AAQSkZJRgABAQEAYABgAAD/2wBDAAMCAgMCAgMDAwMEAwMEBQgFBQQEBQoHBwYIDAoMDAsKCwsNDhIQDQ4RDgsLEBYQERMUFRUVDA8XGBYUGBIUFRT/2wBDAQMEBAUEBQkFBQkUDQsNFBQUF……………./58x/8BX+R/9k=

You can use the Response variable name fileas shown in the example.

getRespone

Microsoft Cognitive Services

Microsoft Cognitive Services component uses Microsoft (Azure) Cognitive Services API. Microsoft Azure Cognitive Services is a set of APIs that make it easy for you to include advanced artificial intelligence capabilities in your apps. To use Microsoft Cognitive Services, you need an Azure Account and a proper subscription model for available APIs. Some Microsoft Cognitive Services features are free to use and you can learn more information from Microsoft Cognitive Services documentation. Some activity responses are in JSON format.

Computer Vision and Face API work with image files. Image files must have a public url address in a web site or storage.

Language API works with text, you can input texts in the modeler.

There are 9 separate activities under Microsoft Cognitive services. These activities work on Computer Vision API, Language API and Face API services. You should create the appropriate APIs from the Azure administration panel to run the related activities. You will need the appropriate API endpoint url and API key information to use each activity.

You can examine the table to find out which activity works with which API.

  • Text Dedection
  • Object Dedection
  • Analyze Image
  • Describe Image
  • Tag Image
  • Language Dedection
  • Sentiment Analysis
  • Key Phrase Extraction
  • Face Dedection

Text detection

Text detection activity detects words from image files. It uses optical character recognition (OCR) technology. The results are JSON format, including the entire extracted string, individual words, and their bounding boxes.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Microsoft Cognitive Services text detection features.

*Ocp Apim Subscription KeyMicrosoft Computer Vision API Key
*EndpointMicrosoft Computer Vision API Url
*Image UrlImage file’s public url address
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response
2dfc034684a3434fb3270534c5efdc66
https://yourapiurl.cognitiveservices.azure.com/
http://example.com/images/test.jpg
getResponse

Face detection

Face detection activity detects faces from image files. Detect human faces in an image, return face rectangles, and optionally with faceIds, landmarks, and attributes.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Microsoft Cognitive Services face detection features.

*Ocp Apim Subscription KeyMicrosoft Face API Key
*EndpointMicrosoft Face API Url
*Image UrlImage file’s public url address
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response
2dfc034684a3434fb3270534c5efdc66
https://yourapiurl.cognitiveservices.azure.com/
http://example.com/images/test.jpg
getResponse

Language detection

Sentiment analysis

Sentiment analysis, features help you find out what people think of your brand or topic by mining text for clues about positive or negative sentiment, and can associate them with specific aspects of the text.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Microsoft Cognitive Services sentiment analysis features.

*Ocp Apim Subscription KeyMicrosoft Language API Key
*EndpointMicrosoft Language API Url
*TextThe text you want to detect in which language
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response
2dfc034684a3434fb3270534c5efdc66
https://yourapiurl.cognitiveservices.azure.com/
Great atmosphere. Close to plenty of restaurants, hotels, and transit! Staff are friendly and helpful.
getResponse

Key phrase extraction

You can use key phrase extraction to identify the main concepts in the text quickly. For example, in the text “The food was delicious, and the staff was wonderful.“, the key phrase extraction will return the main topics: “food” and “wonderful staff.”

You can find detailed information and documentation about Microsoft Cognitive Services key phrase extraction features.

*Ocp Apim Subscription KeyMicrosoft Language API Key
*EndpointMicrosoft Language API Url
*TextThe text you want to detect in which language
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response
2dfc034684a3434fb3270534c5efdc66
https://yourapiurl.cognitiveservices.azure.com/
The food was delicious, and the staff was wonderful.
getResponse

Object detection

Object detection returns the bounding box coordinates (in pixels) for each object found in the image. You can use this functionality to process the relationships between the objects in an image. The object detection function applies tags based on the objects or living things identified in the image.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Microsoft Cognitive Services object detection features.

*Ocp Apim Subscription KeyMicrosoft Computer Vision API Key
*EndpointMicrosoft Computer Vision API Url
*Image UrlImage file’s public url address
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response
2dfc034684a3434fb3270534c5efdc66
https://yourapiurl.cognitiveservices.azure.com/
http://example.com/images/test.jpg
getResponse

Analyze image

The Computer Vision Image Analysis service can extract a wide variety of visual features from your images. For example, it can determine whether an image contains adult content, find specific brands or objects, or find human faces.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Microsoft Cognitive Services analyze image features.

*Ocp Apim Subscription KeyMicrosoft Computer Vision API Key
*EndpointMicrosoft Computer Vision API Url
*Image UrlImage file’s public url address
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response
2dfc034684a3434fb3270534c5efdc66
https://yourapiurl.cognitiveservices.azure.com/
http://example.com/images/test.jpg
getResponse

Describe image

Describe image can analyze an image and generate a human-readable phrase that describes its contents. The algorithm returns several descriptions based on different visual features, and each description is given a confidence score. The final output is a list of descriptions ordered from highest to lowest confidence.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Microsoft Cognitive Services describe image features.

*Ocp Apim Subscription KeyMicrosoft Computer Vision API Key
*EndpointMicrosoft Computer Vision API Url
*Image UrlImage file’s public url address
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response
2dfc034684a3434fb3270534c5efdc66
https://yourapiurl.cognitiveservices.azure.com/
http://example.com/images/test.jpg
getResponse

Tag image

Tag image can return content tags for thousands of recognizable objects, living beings, scenery, and actions that appear in images. Tags are not organized as a taxonomy and do not have inheritance hierarchies. Tagging is not limited to the main subject, such as a person in the foreground, but also includes the setting (indoor or outdoor), furniture, tools, plants, animals, accessories, gadgets, and so on.

You can find detailed information and documentation about Microsoft Cognitive Services tag image features.

*Ocp Apim Subscription KeyMicrosoft Computer Vision API Key
*EndpointMicrosoft Computer Vision API Url
*Image UrlImage file’s public url address
*Response variable nameVariable name to store the http response
2dfc034684a3434fb3270534c5efdc66
https://yourapiurl.cognitiveservices.azure.com/
http://example.com/images/test.jpg
getResponse

SAP

You can automate end-user processes by connecting the SAP GUI application with the SAP component. While using the SAP component, you can use the necessary activities (e.g. Mouse Actions, Set Methods, Functions etc.) under the Applications component while interacting with the SAP application.

To perform your automation operations in the SAP application, you need to find the clickable fields or form fields on the application. You can use the Tracker app to find clickable or form fields.
You can access the Tracker application using path C:Robusta…drivertrackertracker.exe.

  • You can access the information required to use the Tracker application from the Help menu or by pressing the F1 key.

Enable SAP® GUI Scripting on Presentation Server

  • Choose the menu item Options… from the system menu of the SAP® Logon.
  • Choose the node Scripting.
  • The Scripting must be installed and activated.
  • It is better to disable the notifications, otherwise you got a requester for each script execution.
  • It is better to disable the using of native Windows dialogs. On this way the native Windows dialogs, e.g. like Save as or Open, are replaced with a dynpro-based dialog. So you have the possibility to record your activities also with these dialogs.

Enable SAP® GUI Scripting on Application Server

  • Use the transaction code RZ11 in the ok field.
  • Use the profile parameter sapgui/user_scripting and press the Display button.
  • The current value must be TRUE.
  • If it is FALSE, press the Change Value button and change it to TRUE on all servers.

Open SAP session

Open SAP session activity opens the SAP application and login the system.


*SAP Application nameReference name of the application will be opened.
*Connection nameSAP Logon screen’s connection name.
*UsernameEnter the username used when logining the SAP application.
*PasswordEnter the password used when logining the SAP application.
ClientEnter the client value when logining the SAP application.
LanguageEnter the language value when logining the SAP application.
*SAP Logon exe pathThe directory of the SAP application is entered.
Wait timeCan be used during login to the SAP application.(ms)
MaximizeMaximizes the application window if it is checked.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the SAP Application name as shown in the example.

newSapConnection

You can use the Connection name as shown in the example.

You can find your connection name from your SAP Logon screen. You can copy and paste the value. You must enter the same parameters.

SAP Test Connection

You can use the Username as shown in the example.

You can use your or worker’s username to connect the application.

username

You can use the Client as shown in the example.

You can find your client information from SAP Logon screen.

001

You can use the Language as shown in the example.

You can find your language information from SAP Logon screen.

EN

You can use the SAP Logon exe path as shown in the example.

Default SAP logon path is written in the field. If your or worker’s SAP Logon path is in another directory, please make the necessary adjustments.

C:Program Files (x86)SAPFrontEndSAPguisaplogon.exe

You can use the Wait time as shown in the example.

10000

The Session can be closed with the Application > Close activity.

Set SAP command

Set SAP session activity opens the requested page.


*SAP Application nameName of the application which has already been opened attached.
*OkcodeSAP Transaction code field.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the SAP Application name as shown in the example.

${newSapConnection}

You can use the Okcode as shown in the example.

A T-code is a transaction code used whenever executing particular task. You can enter the T-code in the OKcode field.

SU01

Close SAP

The “Close SAP” activity is used to gracefully close an open SAP (Systems, Applications, and Products) application session. This activity ensures that all open windows and dialogs within the SAP application are properly closed


*SAP Application nameReference name of the application will be closed.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the SAP Application name as shown in the example.

SAPClose

Get statusbar info

Gap statusbar info activity enables retrieval of SAP responses.


*SAP Application nameName of the application which has already been opened attached.
*Statusbar typeThe type of status is selected
Response variableThe variable to which the response will be assigned is defined.
Note: * Fields selected with are required, others are optional.

You can use the SAP Application name as shown in the example.

${newSapConnection}

You can use the Statusbar type as shown in the example.

You can choose the appropriate type from the list.

MESSAGE

If MESSAGE is selected,
Example output: ‘Order created successfully.’

MESSAGE TYPE

If MESSAGE TYPE is selected,
Example output: ‘S’ (in the case of success), ‘E’ (in the case of error).

You can use the Response variable as shown in the example.

You can get the related message from status bar, and store in a variable.

getStatus[/direciton]

Orchestrator Components

Reporting/Dashboard

Dashboard Access

You  can access the Robusta RPA Dashboard by clicking on the Reporting icon from the Robusta management panel or from https://xxxxx.xxx:5601 from your Robusta Orchestrator address.

After clicking on the reporting field, the Kibana login screen appears on the screen. You can log in to the system using the username and password provided to you.

After logging in, click on the Dashboard title in the Bar on the left side of the screen.

After clicking on the Dashboard title in the left bar, you can see the predefined dashboard list on the screen.

If you want to create a different dashboard other than the default dashboards, you can create a custom dashboard by using the “Create Dashboard” button at the top right of the screen.

Dashboard General Features

While viewing with Dashboard, you can take advantage of the maximize, share, copy, and edit features.

Full Screen

By using the “Full Screen” option at the top left of the screen, you can view all graphs and numerical indicators in full screen.

Share

With the Share button, you can share instant or live data of the dashboard. With Embed Code, you can share dashboard display links in the iFrame and with Permalinks.

Clone

With the Clone option, you can create a new dashboard by copying the dashboard you viewed.

Edit

With the Edit option, you can make changes on the dashboard of your choice. You can move the charts around, add new charts, delete the charts shown on the screen, or edit the information that the charts show.

Search

You can search and view it by typing the name of the chart you want to view in the Search field.

Schedule

You can view data for the time range you selected by selecting the time range you want to view in the Schedule field.

Refresh

You can refresh the received data with the Refresh button.

Add Filter

With the Add Filter option, you can filter according to the fields used in the creation of the panels and the values they will receive. Depending on the filter applied, you can view information about only one process or only one user.

Options

In the upper right section of any panel, click the “…” By clicking the button, you can access the Properties section of the panel you are viewing. Thanks to this features section, you can examine the information screens in detail and view them in the time interval you choose or in full screen. In addition, with the Inspect option, you can view the data shown by the relevant panel as a table and save it in CSV format.

Delay Dashboard

With the delay dashboard, you can review how long the triggered or queued processes started in Robusta Orchestrator and view the reports. There are a total of 7 panels and tables in the Delay Dashboard.

  • Delayed Processes in Minutes
  • Delayed Processes by Process Instance Name
  • Total Delayed Processes by Worker in Minutes
  • Delayed Processes by Worker in Minutes
  • Delayed Processes by Top 5 Worker in Minutes
  • Delayed Processes by Process Definition
  • Delayed Processes by Process Instance

Delayed Processes in Minutes

According to the time interval you select from the Delayed Processes in Minutes panel, you can view how much delay is experienced in total according to the key information of your processes.

Delayed Processes by Process Instance Name

From the Delayed Processes by Process Instance Name indicator, you can view how much delay is experienced each time your process is triggered. According to the key information, the delays experienced according to different triggering situations from each process are shown.

Total Delayed Processes by Worker in Minutes

From the Delayed Processes by Worker in Minutes panel, you can view how much delay is experienced on a worker basis, and in cases where there are multiple workers, you can load balance between your workers.

Delayed Process Instances by Worker in Minutes

In the Delayed Process Instances by Worker in Minutes panel, you can view how much delay is experienced on a worker-by-worker basis when each process is triggered. With this panel, you can view which triggering is delayed and how long, and you can load balance the worker according to the time interval in which the delays are experienced.

Delayed Processes by Top 5 Workers in Minutes

In the Delayed Processes by Top 5 Workers in Minutes panel, you can view the 5 workers with the most delays according to the magnitude of the delay.

Delayed Processes by Process Definition

From the Delayed Processes by Process Definition table, you can see which process is delayed in which table, how much process is delayed in total, and how many triggers this delay is experienced.

Delayed Processes by Process Instance

In the Delayed Processes by Process Instance table, you can view the amount of time in time that each process is triggered.

Worker Activities

With the Worker Activities Dashboard, you can view how many minutes and how many seconds the workers working in Orchestrator worked in the time interval you specified, how many times which process worked, how busy each worker was at which time of the day, and more information about your workers. There are a total of 9 panels and tables in the Worker Activities Dashboard.

  • Worker-App-Process Selection Filter
  • SumOfProcessDurationInMinutes
  • SumOfProcessDurationInSeconds
  • Worker – Process Count By Started Date
  • Process Duration By Started Date
  • Worker Busyness Chart
  • Running Workers
  • Running Processes Table
  • Waiting Process Queue Table

Worker-App-Process Selection Filter

Work-App-Process Selection Filter is a filtering screen that allows you to view the information shown in this dashboard by filtering it for Worker, App and Process.

Sum of Process Duration in Minutes

In the Sum of Process Duration in Minutes panel, you can view the total number of minutes the workers in your Orchestrator worked during the selected time interval.

Sum of Process Duration in Seconds

In the Sum of Process Duration in Seconds panel, you can view the total number of seconds the workers in your Orchestrator worked during the selected time interval.

Worker-Process Run List

You can view the information about which process has run how many times from the Worker-Process Run List panel.

In addition, by clicking on each process, you can switch to a more detailed view on a process basis.

Worker Process Count by Start Date

With the Worker Process Count by Start Date graph, you can view how long your processes are running based on the start date.

You can view the part of the chart that you want to see in more detail with the mouse and make views on the basis of day-hour-minute. Since the time range you choose offers a dynamic display, other panels will also be affected by this filtering.

Process Duration by Start Date

With the Process Duration by Start Date chart, you can view how many seconds the processes that started in the time interval you selected were running.

You can view the part of the chart that you want to see in more detail with the mouse and make views on the basis of day-hour-minute. Since the time range you choose offers a dynamic display, other panels will also be affected by this filtering.

Worker Busyness Chart

With the Worker Busyness Chart, you can view how busy the workers working in the Orchestrator are in the time period you choose. Thanks to this graph, you can analyze which worker works in which time interval, plan load balancing among your workers or determine the time interval in which your new processes will run.

You can get more detailed information about the status of the relevant process with your mouse over a range shown on the panel.

Running Workers

With the Running Workers chart, you can get information about the workers who worked during the time period you selected. This graph shows which processes the workers run.

You can get more detailed information about the status of the relevant process with your mouse over a range shown on the panel.

Running Processes Table

Running Processes Table, you can use the table to list the user, the worker, and the date on which the process started.

Waiting Process Queue Table

By using the Waiting Process Queue Table, you can view the processes waiting in the queue in a list according to the time of trigger, user information, and process name.

Worker Highlights

With the Worker Highlights Dashboard, you can view the number of active workers on Orchestrator, the busyness status and occupancy rates of your workers, and the pending processes. There are a total of 6 panels on the Worker Highlights Dashboard.

Active Worker Count

It shows the number of workers working in Orchestrator during the time period you specify from the Active Worker Count panel. If there are no active workers in the time period you specify, the result is shown as “0”.

Enabled Worker Count

From the Enabled Worker Count panel, you can view the number of workers waiting to work on Orchestrator in the time interval you specify.

Pending Process Count

You can view the number of processes whose status is in “pending” on Orchestrator in the time interval you specify from the Pending Process Count panel.

Daily Worker Load Status Last 24 Hours

With the Daily Worker Load Status Last 24 Hours panel, you can view the occupancy rate of workers in the last 24 hours as a percentage through Orchestrator.

Daily Worker Load Status Last 6 Hours

With the Daily Worker Load Status Last 6 Hours panel, you can view the occupancy rate of workers in the last 6 hours as a percentage through Orchestrator.

Daily Worker Load Status Last 7 Days

With the Daily Worker Load Status Last 7 Days panel, you can view the occupancy rate of daily workers in the last 7 days as a percentage through Orchestrator.

Worker & Process Highlights

With the Worker & Process Highlights Dashboard, you can view the start times of your Workers and processes running on Orchestrator, end lines, successful-unsuccessful completed processes, your processes running on a worker basis and much different information. There are a total of 20 panels and tables in the Worker & Process Highlights Dashboard.

Running Process

From the Running Process panel, you can view the number of processes that ran in the time interval you selected on Orchestrator.

Success Process

From the Success Process panel, you can view the number of successfully completed processes in the time interval you select on Orchestrator.

Failed Process

From the Failed Process panel, you can view the number of failed processes in the time interval you select on Orchestrator.

Cancelled Process

From the Cancelled Process panel, you can view the number of canceled processes in the time period you selected on Orchestrator.

Process Selection Filter

Work-App-Process Selection Filter is a filtering screen that allows you to view the information shown in this dashboard by filtering it for Worker, App and Process.

Most Used 5 Workers

With the Most Used 5 Workers chart, you can view how many processes the top 5 most used workers ran on Orchestrator during the time period you selected.

If you hover over the area indicated by the mouse on the graph, you can view the number of processes that the relevant worker has run. You can also filter on the basis of worker by clicking on the field shown.

Most Used 5 Workers by Processes

With the Most Used 5 Workers by Processes chart, you can view how many times the 5 most used workers ran which process on Orchestrator in the time period you selected.

If you hover over the area shown with the mouse on the graph, you can view the name of the process that the relevant worker has run and how many times it has run. You can also filter on the basis of worker and process by clicking on the field shown.

Most Used 5 Processes

With the Most Used 5 Processes chart, you can view the top 5 most run processes on Orchestrator during the time period you choose.

If you hover over the area indicated by the mouse on the graph, you can view the number of times the process runs. You can also filter on the basis of worker and process by clicking on the field shown.

Most Used 5 Processes by Status

With the Most Used 5 Processes by Status chart, you can see the status of the 5 most worked processes on Orchestrator in the time period you selected. You can view status statuses as successful, failed, and revoked.

If you hover over the area indicated by the mouse on the graph, you can view how many times the relevant process has run. You can also filter on the basis of worker and process status by clicking on the field shown.

End Status Distribution

With the End Status Distribution chart, you can view the successful, failed, and canceled statuses of the processes running on Orchestrator as a percentage during the time period you choose.

End Status Table by Process

With the End Status Table by Process table, you can view the number of failed processes that ran on Orchestrator during the time period you selected. You can download the table with all statuses to your computer by using the Export option at the bottom left. You can switch between pages by clicking on the pages at the bottom right.

Most Used 5 Workers by Start Date

With the Most Used 5 Workers by Start Date chart, you can view the number of times per day that workers working on Orchestrator worked during the time period you selected.

Most Used 5 Processes by Start Date

With the Most Used 5 Processes by Start Date chart, you can view the number of times per day that the processes running on Orchestrator ran during the time period you selected.

End Status by Start Date

With the End Status by Start Date chart, you can view the completion status of the processes running on Orchestrator on a daily basis during the time period you choose. By selecting a specific time range with the mouse, you can dynamically filter the chart and the entire dashboard.

Process & Status by Latest 5 Worker

With the Process & Status by Latest 5 Worker chart, you can view the processes run by the last 5 workers running on Orchestrator during the time period you choose and the completion status of these processes.

If you hover over the area shown with the mouse on the graph, you can view how many times the relevant process has been completed. You can also filter on the basis of worker and process status by clicking on the field shown.

Average Duration of Top 10 Processes in Minutes

With the Average Duration of Top 10 Processes in Minutes chart, you can view the average number of minutes the top 10 processes that worked on Orchestrator during the time period you selected.

Top 10 Failed Reason of Transactions

With the Top 10 Failed Reason of Transactions chart, you can view the top 10 reasons why processes fail due to tasks or activity in processes running on Orchestrator during the time period you select. Thanks to this graph, you can identify the tasks or activities that receive the most errors in your processes.

Status Trend by Worker

With the Status Trend by Worker chart, you can view the process completion status of the workers by date on Orchestrator as a trend in the time range you choose. Thanks to this graph, you can view which workers have succeeded or failed the processes on which dates. By selecting a specific time range with the mouse, you can dynamically filter the chart and the entire dashboard.

Process Status Trend by Date

With the Process Status Trend by Date chart, you can view the status of the processes completed on Orchestrator as a trend in the time period you choose. By selecting a specific time range with the mouse, you can dynamically filter the chart and the entire dashboard.

End Event Name Table by Process

With the End Event Name Table by Process table, you can view the activity with which the processes that were completed by failing on Orchestrator in the time interval you selected.  In the export field at the bottom right, you can download the table in CSV form to your computer and switch between pages using the page numbers at the bottom left.

IDM (Identity management)

IDM is an interface where you can administrate all users’ authorities and authorize who can access where. Management authorization is given to certain users and only authorized users can access IDM.

Users

Users is an interface where all user in Robusta engine are listed, created and other operations like changing user properties are made.

Create userAccess to user creation field through this button.
Select an actionSelected user details can be changed.
Search by nameUsers on the list can be found via this field.
Found … matching users, showing 1 to 100 Show next 100By clicking can show all users by 100.
Order by user idOrders users by user name.

Create user

To create a new user, click the Create user button and fill in the relevant fields.

User idUser name that user will use to access Robusta. The part before @mail.com.
EmailUser name that user will use for Robusta.
PasswordPassword of user.
First nameFirst name of user.
Last nameLast name of user.
TenantTenant user will belong to.

To active Select an action button, a user must be selected.

Change detailsUser’s details are changed through this window.
Change passwordUser’s password are changed through this window.
DeleteDelete the selected user/s.
IdUser name that users use to access Robusta.
EmailEmail that is defined to user.
NameName of user.
TenantAll users in an organization belongs to the same tenant.

Select an action > Change details

EmailEmail that user uses for Robusta.
First nameFirst name of user.
Last nameLast name of user.
TenantTenant user belongs to.

Select an action > Change password

PasswordNew password.
Repeat passwordType new password again.

Groups

Groups is an interface where you can create groups and add users to groups. Groups interface helps to form groups based on organization/company and or department.

Created group IDs are used as authorization restriction in group access component in Apps interface that are created in Modeler.

To create a new group, click the Create group button.

Fill in the fields and click Save button.

Group idId of group.
NameName of group.

To add user to group, select group from list and click add user field.

To edit group, click pen button. To delete group, click trashcan button. To delete group member, from list, click the trashcan button.

Atfer clicking the pen button, a window will open. You can change group’s name and click the Save button.

Privileges

Privileges is an interface that you can manage who or which group can access where.

There are 3 different authorization control areas in this section.

Access ModulesManage access to modules is managed based on individuals and groups.
Restrict PagesManage access to pages of modules with access permission is restricted. It is managed on an individual basis.
Restrict FunctionsManage access to functions of modules with access permission is restricted. It is managed on an individual basis.

UsersManage users for the relevant application.
GroupsManage groups for the relevant application.
Add a userAdd a user for the relevant application.
ID User name.
EmailEmail of user
NameFirst and last name of user.

To Add Users

  • Click Add a user
  • If no users added yet, Click No users added yet. Click here to add a user.
  • Use the search box to find users

To Add Groups

  • Click Add a group
  • Use the search box to find groups.

To Delete User/Group

Click trashcan icon.


Access identity management applicationManage the permissions of users and user groups authorized to access the IDM module.
Access admin applicationManage the permissions of users and user groups authorized to access the Admin module
Access modeler applicationManage the permissions of users and user groups authorized to access the Modeler module
Access the workflow applicationManage the permissions of users and user groups authorized to access the Workflow module
Access the RPA admin applicationManage the permissions of users and user groups authorized to access the RPA Admin module
Access the scheduler applicationManage the permissions of users and user groups authorized to access the Scheduler module
Access the Rest APIManage the permissions of users and user groups authorized to access the Rest API
IDM GroupsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Groups page
IDM PrivilegesManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Privileges page
IDM UsersManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Users page
Modeler App EditorManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Modeler App Editor page
Modeler App Show DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Modeler App Show Details page
Modeler AppsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Modeler Apps page
Modeler Decision Table EditorManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Decision Table Editor page
Modeler Decision Table Show DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Modeler Decision Table Show Details page
Modeler Decision TablesManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Decision Tables page
Modeler Form EditorManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Modeler Form Editor page
Modeler Form Show DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Modeler Form Show Details page
Modeler FormsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Modeler Forms page
Modeler Process EditorManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Modeler Process Editor page
Modeler Process Show DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Modeler Process Show Details page
Modeler ProcessesManage the permissions of users authorized to access he Modeler Processes page
Scheduler ProcessesManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Processes page
Scheduler Scheduled ProcessesManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Scheduled Processes page
Scheduler TasksManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Tasks page
RPA Admin ChatbotManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Chatbot page
RPA Admin Chatbot EntitiesManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Chatbot Entities page
RPA Admin Chatbot IntentsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Chatbot Intents page
RPA Admin Chatbot ProjectsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Chatbot Projects page
RPA Admin Chatbot Utterance EntitiesManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Chatbot Utterance Entities page
RPA Admin Chatbot UtterancesManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Chatbot Utterances page
RPA Admin Database DefinitionsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Database Definitions page
RPA Admin Database EventsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Database Events page
RPA Admin DatabasesManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Databases page
RPA Admin File EventsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the File Events page
RPA Admin Ftp DefinitionsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Ftp Definitions page
RPA Admin Mail DefinitionsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Mail Definitions page
RPA Admin Secured KeysManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Secured Keys page
RPA Admin System ParametersManage the permissions of users authorized to access the System Parameters page
RPA Admin Worker Build InfoManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Worker Build Info page
RPA Admin Worker DefinitionsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Worker Definitions page
RPA Admin Worker GroupsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Worker Groups page
RPA Admin Worker ScreenshotsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Worker Screenshots page
RPA Admin WorkersManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Workers page
Add Privilege To GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Add Privilege To Group function
Add Privilege To UserManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Add Privilege To User function
Add User To GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Add User To Group function
Change User DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change User Details function
Change User PasswordManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change User Password function
Create GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Group function
Create UserManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create User function
Delete GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Group function
Delete UserManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete User function
Edit GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Edit Group function
Remove Privilege From GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Remove Privilege From Group function
Remove Privilege From UserManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Remove Privilege From User function
Remove User From GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Remove User From Group function
Create AppManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create App function
Create Decision TableManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Decision Table function
Create FormManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Form function
Create ProcessManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Process function
Edit AppManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Edit App function
Edit Decision TableManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Edit Decision Table function
Edit FormManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Edit Form function
Edit ProcessManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Edit Process function
Export AppsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Export Apps function
Import AppManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Import App function
Import Decision TableManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Import Decision Table function
Import ProcessManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Import Process function
Record ProcessManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Record Process function
Create TaskManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Task function
Start ProcessManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Start Process function
Update Process StatusManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Update Process Status function
Add App to Worker GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Add App to Worker Group function
Add Entity to UtteranceManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Add Entity to Utterance function
Add Worker to Worker GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Add Worker to Worker Group function
Change Database Definition DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change Database Definition Details function
Change Database Event DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change Database Event Details function
Change Entity DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change Entity Details function
Change File Event DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change File Event Details function
Change Ftp Definition DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change Ftp Definition Details function
Change Intent DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change Intent Details function
Change Mail Definition DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change Mail Definition Details function
Change Project DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change Project Details function
Change Secured Key DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change Secured Key Details function
Change Utterance DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change Utterance Details function
Change Utterance Entity DetailsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change Utterance Entity Details function
Change Worker Log LevelManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Change Worker Log Level function
Check Worker StatusManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Check Worker Status function
Create Database DefinitionManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Database Definition function
Create Database EventManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Database Event function
Create EntityManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Entity function
Create File EventManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create File Event function
Create Ftp DefinitionManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Ftp Definition function
Create IntentManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Intent function
Create Mail DefinitionManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Mail Definition function
Create ProjectManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Project function
Create Secured KeyManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Secured Key function
Create UtteranceManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Utterance function
Create WorkerManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Worker function
Create Worker GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Create Worker Group function
Delete App from Worker GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete App from Worker Group function
Delete Database DefinitionManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Database Definition function
Delete Database EventManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Database Event function
Delete EntityManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Entity function
Delete File EventManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete File Event function
Delete Ftp DefinitionManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Ftp Definition function
Delete IntentManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Intent function
Delete Mail DefinitionManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Mail Definition function
Delete ProjectManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Project function
Delete UtteranceManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Utterance function
Delete Utterance EntityManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Utterance Entity function
Delete WorkerManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Worker function
Delete Worker from Worker GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Worker from Worker Group function
Delete Worker GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Delete Worker Group function
Download Worker LogsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Download Worker Logs function
Edit Worker GroupManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Edit Worker Group function
Enable/Disable Worker ScreenshottingManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Enable/Disable Worker Screenshotting function
Ftp Definition EventsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Ftp Definition Events function
Mail Definition EventsManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Mail Definition Events function
Train Project ModelManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Train Project Model function
Update System ParametersManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Update System Parameters function
Update WorkerManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Update Worker function
Upload LicenseManage the permissions of users authorized to access the Upload License function

RPA Admin

RPA Admin is an interface where robots on which processes will be run, file, database, FTP and passwords are defined.

File Events

File Events area starts a new process according to operation status such as adding the specific folder to the relevant file, deleting or editing and defines a certain condition for process whose runtime is due. Server where orchestrator is installed must have folders, shared and public folders that server can access.

Create file eventAccess file event creation field through this button.
Select an actionSelected file events can be deleted or their details can changed.
Search by file event nameFile events on the list can be found via this field.
Show next 10By clicking can show all file events by 10.
Order by file event nameOrders workers by worker name.
NameName of worker.
DescriptionDescription of file event.
Action typeFile Event operation type is determined. If File Event has to work under a condition, PRE-CONDITION; TRIGGER is selected only if it will listen for any changes in the folder and trigger a process to run.

To create a file event, click Create file event button and fill in the relevant field. There are two options to create an event; Pre-Conditions and Trigger. Pre-Condition means a process can only be run when the described condition would be provided. On the other hand, Trigger means a described situation occurs or not, then determined process run. Trigger option always listens the described directory without allocate any robot. Click Save button to close the window.

NameName that will be given to file event.
DescriptionDescription of file event.
EnableDetermine whether File Event will be active / running. If Enable is selected, the event becomes active.
PathThe directory in which the folder that will be listened is given.
FilenameThe file name to be listened to is given with its extension. This field is not mandatory but optional. (Ex: *. , Report_ * .txt etc. The file name can also be given using REGEX statements.)
Action typeFile Event operation type is determined. If File Event has to work under a condition, PRE-CONDITION; TRIGGER is selected only if it will listen for any changes in the folder and trigger a process to run.
Event typeWhich changes file event will listen or under which condition file event will work. For TRIGGER, event types are FILE ADDED, FILE REMOVED and FILE CHANGED. For PRE-CONDITION, event type is EXIST.
ProcessProcess that will run for file event. Only in TRIGGER.
ParametersParameters of file event.
WorkerWorker that will run for file event. Only in TRIGGER.

Database

Database is an interface where database information is defined and listed.

Ftp Definitions

Ftp Definitions allows listening to a specific folder via FTP and/or SFTP connection. Ftp definitions can start a process according to the condition of specific file being in desired directory or define precondition for process whose runtime is due.

Create ftp definitionAccess ftp definition creation field through this button.
Select an actionSelected ftp definitions can be deleted, their details can be changed or a new ftp event can be defined.
Search by ftp definition nameDatabase definitions on the list can be found via this field.
Show next 10By clicking can show all database definitions by 10.
Order by db definition nameOrders database definitions by database definitions name.
NameName of database definition.
DescriptionDescription of database definition.
Hostname
UsernameName of user that will create database definitions.
Connection type

Click Create ftp definiton button to create ftp definition.

NameName of ftp definiton.
DescriptionDescription of ftp defintion.
Connection typeFTP / SFTP option is selected.
HostnameThe server name.
PortPort information.
UsernameServer username information.
PasswordServer password information. If free text is selected, password will be seen in log data. If it is desired password not to be seen, information should be entered through vault system.

button allows checking the FTP connection and settings before creating the ftp definition.

To define ftp event, select ftp definition from list, click Select an action button and select Events.

On the opening window, fill in the relevant fields. There are two options to create an event; Pre-Conditions and Trigger. Pre-Condition means to start process whose runtime is due, desired file must be in directory. Trigger means if file is in the relevant directory, a new process starts. In the Interval box, the frequency of operation is entered. Select the process from Process box. In the parameter field, parameters of event is entered. If you want file to be deleted after process is done, select Remove in Post action list, if you want to move file, select Move in Post action list. Last, click Save button to finish to define the ftp event

EventsSelect file events that was created.
NameName that will be given to ftp event.
EnableDetermine whether Ftp Event will be active/running. If Enable is selected, the event becomes active.
PathThe directory in which the folder that will be listened is given.
FilenameThe file name to be listened to is given with its extension. This field is not mandatory but optional. (Ex: *. , Report_ * .txt etc. The file name can also be given using REGEX statements.)
Action typeThere are two options to create an event; Pre-Conditions and Trigger. Pre-Condition means to start process whose runtime is due, desired file must be in directory. Trigger means if file is in the relevant directory, a new process starts.
IntervalFrequency of ftp event. Only in TRIGGER.
ProcessProcess that will run for ftp event. Only in TRIGGER.
ParametersParameters of ftp event. Only in TRIGGER.
WorkerWorker that will run for ftp event. Only in TRIGGER.
Post actionIf you want file to be deleted after process is done, select Remove in Post action list, if you want to move file, select Move in Post action list. Only in TRIGGER.
PathIf you select Move in Post action list, type the directory path of ftp event to move it another directory. Only in TRIGGER.

Secured keys

Secured keys is an interface where secure and unsecure variable definitions are made to access systems or use within process. Confidential data like passwords are defined here to hide in vault in a secure environment.

Create secure keyAccess secure key creation field through this button.
Select an actionSelected secured keys details can be changed.
Search by secured key nameSecured key on the list can be found via this field.
Order by secured key nameOrders secured keys by secured key name.
Key groupGroup information to distinguish key.
NameName of secured key.
SecuredKey value is visible in the list or not.
Key valueValue of key.

To use Secured Keys field via RPA-Admin interface, vault service must be active. To start vault service, follow the steps below:

  • Run CMD as administrator.
  • On the screen type vault server -config=C:RobustaOrchestratorvaultconfig.hcl and press enter.
  • Then, a new CMD window will be opened and unseal first 3 key.
  • The keys aforementioned are in vault_keys file in C:RobustaOrchestratorvault directory.

vault unseal  key1 (enter)

vault unseal  key2 (enter)

vault unseal  key3 (enter)

Click Create secured key button to create key. On the image below, you can see file events definition that is created.

In Key group box, type key group and think of each app as key group. In Key box, enter information that will be kept. If information entered is a password that must be hidden, select Secure checkbox. Click Save button to finish to create key.

Key groupGroup information to distinguish key.
KeyName of key.
ValueThe value to be given to the key.
SecuredDetermines whether the value given to the key is visible in the list. If selected, Key Value column in the list appears as ” ***** “.

The generated keys can be called as as variables and their values can be used in an encrypted way within processes. These keys can be typed as vault(Key Group,Key) in every field where variables can be used.

If you want to use PASSWORD variable in the MAILEXCHANGE key group within a process, you should type vault(MAILEXCHANGE,PASSWORD) to use in an encrypted way.

The key value can not accept some of the special characters. For example: “ç”,”ß”,”é” etc.

Workers

In the workers’ tab, you can define new workers, check the workers’ status, and create worker groups.

Mail definitions

Mail definitions is an interface where authorized username and protocol information like IMAP, POP3, EXCHANGE and SMTP is defined to read, send mail et. within process. It enables mail definitions to be made globally and to use these environment-independent definitions.

Create mail definitionAccess mail definition creation field through this button.
Select an actionSelected mail definitions can be deleted, their details can be changed or a new ftp event can be defined.
Search by mail definition nameMail definitions on the list can be found via this field.
Show next 10By clicking can show all mail definitions by 10.
Order by Mail Definition NameOrders mail definitions by mail definitions name.
NameName of mail definition.
DescriptionDescription of mail definition.
ProtocolProtocol information of mail definition.

By clicking the Create Mail Definition button, a mail identifier and a mail event listener are created. You can see the previously created Mail Event definitions in the image below and enter mail definitions into the relevant fields.

NameName of mail definition.
DescriptionDescription of name.
ProtocolMail Protocol information. IMAP, POP3, EXCHANGE, SMTP protocols are supported.
HostnameMail server name.
UsernameMail username information.
PasswordMail password information.
SSL,TLS Enables, TLS RequiredSSL, TLS is selected according to the requirement.
DomainDomain information.
Server TypeType of server.

After mail definition is made, click Select an action button and choose Events to add event.

Fill in the fields to make an event listener definition. Although the fields for PRE-CONDITION and TRIGGER options are similar, there are differences, they will be displayed separately.

PRE-CONDITION

Saved eventsIf you want to use “event” defined before, it is selected from the list. If the list is empty, it means there is no “event” defined before.
EnableIt is determined whether the Mail Event will be active/working. If Enable is selected, the event becomes active.
NameName of mail event.
Action typeMail Event operation type is determined. If Maill Event has to work under a certain condition, PRE-CONDITION; TRIGGER is selected only if it will listen for any changes in the folder and trigger a process to run.
FolderThe folder name you want to rest is written in the mailbox. The name displayed in the mail interface is taken as basis. (Eg: A Turkish mail interface is written as “Inbox” and an English mail interface is written as “Inbox”.)
Only unreadOnly unread mails are taken as basis.
Mark as readMark unread mails as read.
From newest to oldest – oldest to newestThe order in which emails should be read can be selected.
Trigger one by one – all in one“Trigger all in one” refers to activating multiple triggers simultaneously or collectively, while
“Trigger one by one” means activating each trigger separately, in a sequential order.
FromThe information about who will send the mail.
ToThe information to whom the mail will be sent.
SubjectThe subject of the mail.
Newer than(seconds)Controls mailbox periodically based on the Check interval(seconds) field. If mail that is sent from email address that is defined in the To field with the subject is newer than seconds in the Check interval(seconds) field, it is pre-condition to start an event.

TRIGGER

Saved eventsIf you want to use “event” defined before, it is selected from the list. If the list is empty, it means there is no “event” defined before.
EnableIt is determined whether the Mail Event will be active/working. If Enable is selected, the event becomes active.
NameName of mail event.
Action typeMail Event operation type is determined. If Maill Event has to work under a certain condition, PRE-CONDITION; TRIGGER is selected only if it will listen for any changes in the folder and trigger a process to run.
FolderThe folder name you want to rest is written in the mailbox. The name displayed in the mail interface is taken as basis. (Eg: A Turkish mail interface is written as “Inbox” and an English mail interface is written as “Inbox”.)
Only unreadOnly unread mails are taken as basis.
Mark as readMark unread mails as read.
Check interval(seconds)How many seconds intervals the control will be made.
ProcessProcess that will be triggered.
ParametersProcess parameter that will be triggered.
WorkerOn which worker mail event will be executed.
FromThe information about who will send the mail. Multiple values can be entered.
ToThe information to whom the mail will be sent. Multiple values can be entered.
SubjectThe subject of the mail. Multiple values can be entered.
Newer than(seconds)Controls mailbox periodically based on the Check interval(seconds) field. If mail that is sent from email address that is defined in the To field with the subject is newer than seconds in the Check interval(seconds) field, it triggers the event.

Chatbot


A chatbot is a program that interacts with users in natural language, either in written or spoken form. It is typically designed to perform specific tasks, provide information, or fulfill user requests.

Key Concepts in Chatbot

Projects:

A project refers to the development project of the chatbot. In this project, features of the chatbot, usage scenarios, data collection and processing processes, training data, and other components are included.

Intent:

Intent represents the purpose or desire in a user’s expression. Chatbots use intent analysis to understand the user’s intention. For example, the intent of a user wanting to make a restaurant reservation could be “make a reservation.”

Entity:

Entity is a specific piece of information associated with an intent. It represents important details within a user’s expression related to a specific topic or category. In the restaurant reservation example, details such as “reservation date” or “number of people” could be considered as entities.

Utterances:

Utterances are expressions used by users to communicate with the bot. The bot uses intent and entity analysis to understand these utterances and provide an appropriate response. For instance, when a user says, “I want to book a table for tomorrow evening,” this is an utterance, and the bot analyzes it to determine the intent and entities involved.

Utterances Entities:

Utterances entities are specific elements representing information in user expressions. The bot recognizes these entities by extracting relevant de